Project Manual Cover908 north thompson street richmond, virginia 23230 804-353-2635 12 April 2016...

908 north thompson streetrichmond, virginia 23230804-353-2635

12 April 2016

P R O J E C T M A N U A LConstruction Bid Set

SOUTHSIDE COMMUNITY CENTER

PARKS, RECREATION AND COMMUNITY FACILITIES

COR PROJ. #O-28697

Southside Community Center - Gymnasium Renovation WA-1509

Table of Contents - 1

PROJECT MANUAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Statement of Work

2. Bid Form

3. General Conditions of the Contract

4. Special Conditions

5. Forms and Attachments • Affidavit of Payment of Claims • City of Richmond, VA Bid Bond • MPE-3 Compliance Monitoring Report • Sample Contract • Sample Performance and Payment Bond

6. Technical Specifications

Section Title 00 31 00 Available Project Information DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 Summary 01 20 00 Price and Payment Procedures 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 60 00 Product Requirements 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 19 Selective Structure Demolition DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete



DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 04 05 03 Masonry Mortaring and Grouting 04 20 00 Unit Masonry. DIVISION 05 - METALS 05 52 00 Metal Railings DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry 06 41 00 Architectural Woodwork DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 21 29 Acoustical Spray Finish 07 84 00 Firestopping 07 90 00 Joint Protection DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 08 12 14 Standard Steel Frames 08 13 14 Standard Steel Doors 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors 08 31 13 Access Doors and Frames 08 41 13 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08 71 00 Door Hardware 08 80 00 Glazing DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 51 13 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 64 02 Wood Athletic Flooring 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring 09 66 00 Resilient Athletic Flooring 09 67 00 Fluid Applied Flooring 09 68 13 Tile Carpeting 09 77 16 Acoustical Wall Panels 09 90 00 Painting and Coating DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10 21 15 Plastic Toilet Compartments 10 28 00 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties



DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11 50 00 Athletic Equipment DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12 76 00 Telescoping Stands DIVISION 13 - NOT USED

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 14 42 00 Wheelchair Lifts

DIVISIONS 15 TO 21 - NOT USED

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 22 00 00 Basic Plumbing Requirements

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR-CONDITIONING 23 00 00 Basic HVAC Requirements

DIVISION 25 - NOT USED

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 Basic Electrical Requirements

DIVISIONS 27 TO 49 - NOT USED

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS


Available Project Information 00 31 00-1

DOCUMENT 00 31 00

AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Document Includes: Hazardous materials investigation and report.

1.2 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS INVESTIGATION REPORT

A. The Owner has had an investigation of these facilities for the presence of asbestos and lead containing materials. Contact L. Dexter Goode at the City of Richmond for a copy of the hazardous materials report prior to commencing on-site construction activities.

B. The contractor must familiarize himself with the conditions at the building where hazardous materials may or may not be present.

C. In the event suspect materials are encountered the contractor shall notify the Owner immediately. The Owner will then schedule testing of such materials. If the material is found to be hazardous it shall be abated by either an independent contractor of the Owner, or added to the scope of this contract by Change Order.

END OF DOCUMENT


Summary 01 10 00-1

SECTION 01 10 00

SUMMARY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Description. 2. Time for completion. 3. Permits and fees. 4. Work by Owner. 5. Contractor's use of site and premises. 6. Work restrictions. 7. Drawings and Specifications. 8. Additional Specification Requirements.

B. Related Sections: Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. This construction primarily consists of work associated with the interior renovation of a portion of an unoccupied, existing facility to repurpose it to function as a Community Center.

B. The Work includes selective demolition and alterations for creation of two new multi-purpose Community rooms, new ADA accessible toilet facilities, and a new HVAC system to serve the reconfigured spaces. Renovation work will include, but not be limited to, miscellaneous alterations, finish improvements and new gymnasium equipment in the existing Gymnatorium, Entrance Lobby (and adjacent spaces), and the second floor spaces above the Lobby.

C. Replacement the existing roof system over the work areas has recently been completed by the City of Richmond. Any work associated with this new roof, including new penetrations, must be coordinated directly with the Owner's Representative and it’s roofing contractor to maintain roof warranty.

D. Perform Work of this Contract under the form of agreement between the Owner Contractor in accordance with the General and Supplementary Conditions of Contract. 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

E. All Work shown or specified is part of this project unless noted as “NIC” or “By Owner”. All equipment indicated on the drawings and herein specified shall be Contractor Furnished & Contractor Installed (CFCI), unless specifically noted otherwise.


Summary 01 10 00-2

1.3 TIME FOR COMPLETION

A. The Owner’s goal is to have full-scale construction activities underway by the first week of April 2016 with achievement of Substantial Completions by the last week of September 2016. Final Completion shall be achieved by 28 October 2016.

1.4 PERMITS AND FEES

A. The Contractor shall apply for and pay the building permit fee as part of this Work.

B. The Contractor shall apply for and pay fees for all other necessary permits, except as noted otherwise in these Construction Documents.

C. The Owner will pay for all utility connection fees related to the project.

1.5 WORK BY OWNER

A. Items noted NIC (Not in Contract) shall be furnished and installed by Owner.

B. The following work or products shall be Owner Furnished and Owner Installed (OFOI), and are not part of the Work to be performed under this construction contract, except where certain rough-in or other preparatory work is noted to be included: 1. Exterior painting, except for exterior facings of new work of this contract, such

as new metal doors and frames. 2. Telephone / Computer Equipment & Cabling. 3. Access Control and Security Systems. 4. Residential kitchen equipment; full size refrigerator and under counter

refrigerator. 5. Commercial ice machine. 6. Interior Signs. 7. Roof flashings for new roof penetrations as part of this Work. 8. Stage performance lighting. 9. Furnishings. 10. Toilet Accessories: As noted on drawings.

C. Contractor Responsibilities Relative to OFOI Items: 1. Plan, schedule and coordinate the installation of owner-furnished equipment or

systems with all trades engaged in this contract. 2. Provide rough-in services, blocking and other required preparation work to

accommodate OFOI items. 3. Review Owner-reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 4. Identify potential problems by appropriate planning and scheduling techniques

and bring them to the attention of the Architect in a timely manner to allow for their orderly resolution.

5. Cooperate with the Owner and his subcontractors as they undertake their work simultaneously with the work of this contract.


Summary 01 10 00-3

1.6 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE AND PREMISES

A. Limit use of site and premises to allow: 1. Work by Owner and it’s authorized agents and contractors. 2. Use of other site areas not directly affected by this Work by the public.

B. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Maintain existing exits and provide temporary exits as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Construction Operations: Limited to use of Project site to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Limits: Confine construction operations to areas of work. Interior access to be

coordinated with the Owner and shall be limited to areas of work. 2. Limits: Do not disturb site area in any way, except for areas of work. Damage to

vegetation to be replaced at contractor's own expense. 3. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways, walks and stairs open at

all times, unless authorized by the Owner. a. On site area for Contractor use will be available. Owner to designate

parking and lay-down areas for Contractor use. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage

of materials and equipment on site.

1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of

authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to the requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

C. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of entrances, operable windows or outdoor air-intakes.

D. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site is not permitted.

1.8 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. The Contractor shall maintain during the work and shall provide the Architect with one set of marked prints showing any modifications between the original plans and final “as-constructed” conditions. The Contractor shall provide the marked set of drawings to the Architect at the final inspection.

B. The drawings for plumbing, sprinkler, heating, ventilating, air-conditioning and electrical work are diagrammatic illustrations merely intended to show the general arrangements and locations of piping, ducts and fixtures, except where specific dimensions are shown.


Summary 01 10 00-4

Make reasonable modifications as required for the proper execution of the work in a manner acceptable to the Architect, and to avoid piping, ducts, conduits or structural members without additional cost to the Owner.

C. These specifications are written in imperative mood and streamlined form. This imperative language is directed to the Contractor, unless specifically noted otherwise. The words “shall be” are included by inference where a colon (:) is used within sentences or phrases.

1.9 ADDITIONAL SPECIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Specifications On Drawings: Be advised that various specification requirements for concrete, masonry, structural steel, plumbing, mechanical and electrical work are indicated on the drawings as opposed to being included in this Project Manual.

B. Where fire-resistive ratings for various construction elements are indicated on the drawings, provide materials and construct assemblies in compliance with the cited or appropriate Underwriter’s Laboratories Design No. for the situation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used.

END OF SECTION


Price and Payment Procedures 01 20 00-1

SECTION 01 20 00

PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Clarification

B. Cash Allowances.

C. Unit prices.

D. Alternates.

E. Schedule of values.

F. Applications for payment.

G. Change procedures.

H. Defect assessment.

1.2 CLARIFICATION

A. Where requirements of this Specification Section conflict with those stipulated in the General and Special Conditions of the Contract, the requirements of the Owner’s General & Special Conditions shall govern.

1.3 CASH ALLOWANCES

A. Cost Included in Cash Allowances: 1. Cost of product and related installation materials to Contractor or Subcontractor,

less applicable trade discounts; including delivery to Site and applicable taxes unless stated otherwise in Allowance Schedule.

2. Cost of any mark-ups applied by Contractor or Subcontractor to actual costs for product to Contractor or Subcontractor.

3. Cost of labor for demolishing/removal of any existing work associated with installation of the replacement work.

4. Cost of labor for installation and finishing the product. 5. Cost of any warranties required by these specifications for the installed product.

B. Costs Not Included in Cash Allowances, but Included in Contract Sum/Price: Product handling at Site including unloading, uncrating, and storage; protection of products.

C. Refer to Unit Prices in this Section for adjustments to stipulated Allowances within the Contract Sum.



D. Architect/Engineer Responsibilities: 1. Select products in consultation with Owner. 2. Prepare Change Order to adjust for actual quantities.

E. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Obtain proposals from suppliers and installers and offer recommendations. 2. Upon notification of selection by Owner, execute purchase agreement with

designated supplier and installer. 3. Arrange for and process Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. Arrange for

delivery. 4. Promptly inspect products upon delivery for completeness, damage and defects.

Submit claims for transportation damage.

F. Differences in costs based on actual quantities will be adjusted by Change Order.

G. Cash Allowance Schedule: 1. Acoustical Testing: Reference Section 09 77 16 - Acoustical Wall Panels.

a. Include the stipulated sum of $750 as part of the Base Bid amount on the Bid Form for Contract Sum/Price for acoustical testing to determine the minimum quantity of acoustical wall panels to manage acoustics in the Gymnatorium for multi-purpose use including athletics, community functions and stage performances.

b. Testing to occur after the installation of the Acoustical Spray Insulation on the metal roof deck and installation of new gym flooring.

c. Company to perform acoustical testing shall be pre-approved by the Owner prior to undertaking the testing work.

d. Basis of Source for Acoustical Testing: Acoustical Solutions; contact Matt Boughan at (804) 346-8350.

2. Acoustical Wall Panels: Reference Section 09 77 16. a. Include a stipulated sum price, as part of the Base Bid amount, on the

Bid Form for purchase, delivery and installation of new acoustical wall panels.

b. Base proposed price on 800 sq. ft. of new acoustical wall panels for walls in the Gymnatorium. Presumed size / quantity of new acoustical wall panels is 20 panels at 40 sq ft each.

3. Replacement of Electrical Circuits: Reference Electrical Drawings and Section 26 00 00 - Electrical Basic Requirements. a. Include a stipulated sum price, as part of the Base Bid amount, on the

Bid Form for the Contract Sum/Price, the removal of non-code complaint existing ‘Romex’ circuits and installation of new, code-compliant MC replacement circuits.

b. Base proposed price on 700 linear ft. of replacement circuits.

1.4 UNIT PRICES

A. Unit prices is a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment or services, or a portion of the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the scope of Work or estimated quantities of Work by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased.



B. Procedures: 1. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation,

insurance applicable taxes, overhead and profit. 2. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that

involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.

C. Schedule of Unit Prices: 1. Unit Price No. 01 - Acoustical Wall Panels

a. Description: New acoustical wall panels on walls of Gymnatorium. Removal of existing acoustical baffles and wall panels is part of demolition work scope and is not part of this unit price.

b. Unit of Measurement: Square Foot. c. Quantity: 800 SF in Contract Sum as stipulated in Allowances.

2. Unit Price No. 02 - Replacement of Electrical Circuits. a. Description: Replacement of existing ‘Romex’ circuits with code-

compliant MC cable/wiring. b. Unit of Measurement: Linear Foot. c. Quantity: 700 LF in Contract Sum as stipulated in Allowances.

1.5 ALTERNATES

A. Provide proposals for stipulated Alternates on Bid Forms. These alternate proposals will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at Owner's option. Accepted Alternates will be identified in Owner-Contractor Agreement. The Owner-Contractor Agreement may identify certain Alternates to remain an Owner option for a stipulated period of time.

B. Coordinate related Work and modify surrounding Work. Description for each Alternate is recognized to be abbreviated, but requires that each change shall be complete for scope of Work affected. 1. Coordinate related requirements among Specification Sections as required. 2. Include as part of each Alternate: Miscellaneous devices, appurtenances, and

similar items incidental to or necessary for complete installation. 3. Coordinate Alternate with adjacent Work and modify or adjust as necessary to

ensure integration.

C. Schedule of Alternates: 1. Alternate No.1: Wood Athletic Floor for Gymnasium (107).

a. Substitute Wood Athletic Flooring per Section 09 64 20 and Drawing Number AE701 in lieu of Resilient Athletic Flooring per Section 09-65-00, which is a component of the Base Bid, Contract Sum.

1.6 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative

forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets.



b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's

construction schedule. 2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later

than seven (7) days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment

B. Format and Content: Utilize Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of major specification Section. Identify site mobilization, bonds and insurance. 1. Identification: Include the following Project information on the schedule of

values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued

evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principle subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.

4. Round amounts to the nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work

where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

6. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent state of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

7. Include in each line item amount of allowances as specified in this Section. 8. Include separately from each line item, direct proportional amount of

Contractor's overhead and profit. 9. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For

Payment.

1.7 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial

Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Period: Submit Application for Payment to Architect by the first of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month.

C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment.



D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without this action. 1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction

schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued

before last day of construction period covered by application.

E. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments, if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording

appropriate information about application.

F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous

application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application show completion of an item, submit conditional final

waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must

submit waivers. 4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to the

Owner.

G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must preceded or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Schedule of unit prices. 5. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 6. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.

H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete

with a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued

previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

I. Final Application for Payment: After completing Project close out requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project close out requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and

proof that taxes, fee and similar obligations were paid.



3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and

Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707-1994, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar

data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.

J. Substantiating Data: When Architect requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. Include the following with Application for Payment: 1. Current construction photographs. 2. Partial release of liens from major subcontractors and vendors. 3. Affidavits attesting to off-site stored products.

a. Payment shall be limited to a maximum of ninety percent (90%) of the value of off-site stored products.

4. Construction progress schedules, revised and current.

1.8 CHANGE PROCEDURES

A. Submittals: Submit name of individual authorized to receive change documents, and be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ or Subcontractors of changes to the Work.

B. The Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment to Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time by issuing supplemental instructions on AIA Form G710.

C. The Architect may issue a Proposal Request including a detailed description of proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change with stipulation of overtime work required and the period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. Contractor will prepare and submit estimate within 10 days.

D. Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for change to Architect, describing proposed change and its full effect on the Work. Include a statement describing reason for the change, and effect on Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing effect on Work by separate or other Contractors. Document requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01 60 00.

E. Stipulated Sum/Price Change Order: Based on Proposal Request and Contractor's fixed price quotation or Contractor's request for Change Order as approved by Architect.

F. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue directive, on AIA Form G713 Construction Change Directive signed by Owner, instructing Contractor to proceed with change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. Document will describe



changes in the Work, and designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time. Promptly execute change.

G. Time and Material Change Order: Submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in Conditions of the Contract. Architect will determine change allowable in Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time as provided in Contract Documents.

H. Maintain detailed records of work done on Time and Material basis. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs for changes in the Work.

I. Document each quotation for change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow evaluation of quotation.

J. Change Order Forms: Standard City of Richmond form.

K. Execution of Change Orders: Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in Conditions of the Contract. 1. To the extent practical, change orders will be processed and finalized prior to

each monthly pay request submittal.

L. Correlation Of Contractor Submittals: 1. Promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record

each authorized Change Order as separate line item and adjust Contract Sum/Price.

2. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect change in Contract Time, revise sub-schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit.

3. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents.

1.9 DEFECT ASSESSMENT

A. Replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to specified requirements.

B. If, in the opinion of the Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the Architect will direct appropriate remedy or adjust payment.

C. The defective Work may remain, but unit sum/price will be adjusted to new sum/price at discretion of Architect.

D. Defective Work will be partially repaired to instructions of Architect, and unit sum/price will be adjusted to new sum/price at discretion of Architect.

E. Individual specification sections may modify these options or may identify specific formula or percentage sum/price reduction.

F. Authority of Architect to assess defects and identify payment adjustments is final.



G. Non-Payment For Rejected Products: Payment will not be made for rejected products for any of the following: 1. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable. 2. Products determined as unacceptable before or after placement. 3. Products not completely unloaded from transporting vehicle. 4. Products placed beyond lines and levels of required Work. 5. Products remaining on hand after completion of the Work. 6. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected products.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used.

END OF SECTION


Substitution Procedures 01 25 00-1

DOCUMENT 01 25 00

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Document Includes: Administration and procedural requirement for substitutions.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures 2. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Change in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawings numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1 A. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the

following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation

cannot be provided, if applicable. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed

to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitutions with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names

and addresses and names of and addresses of Architects and Owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and

interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated.



i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICC-ES.

j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability or delays in delivery.

k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.

l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents expect as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.

m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to product indicated results.

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within fifteen days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or

Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a

proposed substitution within time allocated.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than fifteen days prior to time required for preparation an review of related submittals. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the

following conditions are satisfied: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and

will product indicated results. b. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction

schedule. c. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities

having jurisdiction.



d. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of Work. e. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the

Work. f. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. g. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested

substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not Allowed.

PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF DOCUMENT


Administrative Requirements 01 30 00-1

SECTION 01 30 00

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to the following: 1. Coordination and project conditions. 2. Requests for Information (RFIs). 3. Preconstruction meeting. 4. Pre-installation conferences. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Cutting and patching. 7. Special procedures. 8. Project Superintendent.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.

1.3 COORDINATION AND PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of various sections of Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. 1. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special

procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and lists of attendees at meetings. a. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if

coordination of their Work is required.

B. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity. 1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough

to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of

architectural, structural, civil, mechanical and electrical systems. b. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note

dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect



indicated proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installation will not be considered changes to the Contract.

C. Verify utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, operating equipment.

D. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical Work indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.

E. In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of Work of separate sections in preparation for Substantial Completion.

G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities.

1.4 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by

Contractor with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner as to avoid delays in

Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content to the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract

Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature.



13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings and other information to fully describe items needing interpretation.

C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716 or Contractor's own form.

D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven (7) working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 pm will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Request for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretations of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to contract modification procedures. a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract

Time or the Contract Sum, notify the Architect in writing within seven (7) days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. On receipt of Architect's action, immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven (7) days if Contractor disagrees with response. 1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change

Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive and Proposal

Request, as appropriate.

1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. Architect will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement.

B. Attendance Required: Owner, Architect/Engineer, and Contractor and its Superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters related to the Work.

C. Agenda: 1. Tentative construction schedule.



2. Critical work sequencing and long-lead times. 3. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 4. Distribution of Contract Documents. 5. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of products, schedule of values, and

progress schedule. 6. Submission of list of key personnel with phone numbers for contact during an

emergency situation at any time during construction. 7. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions,

applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures.

8. Procedures for RFIs. 9. Procedures for testing and inspecting. 10. Preparation of record documents. 11. Use of the premises and existing building. 12. Work restrictions. 13. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. 14. Procedures for disruptions or shutdowns. 15. Construction waste management and recycling. 16. Parking availability. 17. Office, work and storage areas. 18. Equipment deliveries and priorities. 19. First aid. 20. Security. 21. Progress Cleaning.

D. Architect to record minutes and distribute copies within three days after meeting to participants, with copies to Architect/Engineer, Owner, and those affected by decisions made.

1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Conduct a pre-installation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

B. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of schedule meeting dates.

C. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: 1. Contract Documents. 2. Options. 3. Related RFIs. 4. Related Change Orders. 5. Purchases. 6. Deliveries. 7. Submittals. 8. Review of mockups.



9. Possible conflicts. 10. Compatibility problems. 11. Time schedules. 12. Weather limitations. 13. Manufacturer's written instructions. 14. Warranty requirements. 15. Compatibility of materials. 16. Acceptability of substrates. 17. Temporary facilities and controls. 18. Space and access limitations. 19. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 20. Testing and inspecting requirements. 21. Installation procedures. 22. Coordination with other work. 23. Required performance results. 24. Protection of adjacent work. 25. Protection of construction and personnel.

D. Record significant conference discussions, including corrective measures and actions.

E. Reporting: Distribute minutes to the meeting of each party present and to other parties requiring information.

F. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at the earliest feasible date.

1.7 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at a minimum of twice a month intervals.

B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings.

C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major subcontractors and suppliers, Owner, Architect/Engineer, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting.

D. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems impeding planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Coordination of projected progress.



11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Other business relating to Work. 14. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

a. Interface requirements. b. Sequence of operations. c. Status of submittals. d. Deliveries. e. Off-site fabrication. f. Access. g. Site utilization. h. Temporary facilities and controls. i. Progress cleaning. j. Quality and work standards. k. Status of correction of deficient items. l. Field observations. m. Status of RFIs. n. Status of proposal requests. o. Pending changes. p. Status of change orders. q. Pending claims and disputes. r. Documentation of information for payment requests.

E. Architect will record minutes and distribute copies within five days after meeting to participants, with copies to Owner, and those affected by decisions made.

1.8 PROJECT SUPERINTENDENT

A. Contractor shall provide a full-time non-working superintendent to manage daily operations on the project site. Superintendent shall serve in a management capacity and shall not be directly tasked with construction work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching.

B. Submit written request in advance of cutting or altering elements affecting: 1. Structural integrity of element. 2. Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.



5. Work of Owner or separate contractor.

C. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, to complete Work, and to: 1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other Work. 2. Uncover Work to install or correct ill-timed Work. 3. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming Work. 4. Remove samples of installed Work for testing. 5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and

electrical Work.

D. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and to provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing.

E. Cut masonry and concrete materials using masonry saw or core drill.

F. Restore Work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

G. Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, including rotting wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete. Replace materials as specified for finished work.

H. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces.

I. Prepare surface and remove surface finishes to permit installation of new Work and finishes.

J. Fit Work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.

K. Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction; completely seal voids.

L. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07 84 00, to full thickness of penetrated element.

M. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection; for assembly, refinish entire unit.

N. Identify hazardous substances or conditions exposed during the Work to Architect/Engineer for decision or remedy.

END OF SECTION


Construction Progress Documentation 01 32 00-1

DOCUMENT 01 32 00

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Construction schedule updating reports. 3. Daily construction reports. 4. Site condition reports.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of the project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the

planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

B. CMP: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.

C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

D. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor,

but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format: 1. PDF electronic file.

B. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities.

C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period.



D. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.

E. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at biweekly intervals.

F. Site Conditions Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from

entities involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and

schedule them in proper sequence.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Time Frame: Extend schedule for date established for commencement of the Work to date of final competition. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that

shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 10 days, unless

specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following

long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication and delivery.

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.

4. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

5. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion.

2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GNATT CHART)

A. Gnatt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gnatt-chart-type, Contractor's construction schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.



B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Indentify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. 1. For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete,

indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar.

2.3 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. list of subcontractors and Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of

rain or snow. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events. 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized.

B. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions

have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.



2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.

3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.

B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and

post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.

END OF DOCUMENT


Submittal Procedures 01 33 00-1

SECTION 01 33 00

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirement for submitting the following: 1. Proposed products list. 2. Product data. 3. Shop drawings. 4. Samples. 5. Test reports. 6. Certificates. 7. Manufacturer's instructions. 8. Manufacturer's field reports. 9. Construction photographs. 10. Record Drawings. 11. Product Warranties and Product Bonds.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action.

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time of handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1. Submit Schedule required to be submitted and approved prior to other submittals.

1.4 SUBMITTAL ADMINSTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other

submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.



2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring

coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

B. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow

additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in the same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: All 15 days for review of each resubmittal.

C. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal files as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single PDF file incorporating

submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form. Each submittal is to be submitted as a separate file.

2. Submit Submittals via email or FTP site as directed by Architect. 3. All submittal files to be in unprotected PDF file format that may be readily

edited, marked up or otherwise altered by PDF editing software such as Adobe Acrobat or Bluebeam.

4. Format pages of submittal package as standard sheet sizes no smaller than letter size.

5. Format file name as follows: "Submittal Number" - "Specification Number"- "Type"-"Description".pdf

a. Submittal Number: Three digit consecutive submittal number with two digit revision suffix. Ex: "003.01"

b. Specification number: Ex "013000" c. Type: Ex: Product Data, Shop Drawing, Sample Warranty, etc. d. General Description: Ex: "Joint Sealants." File Name example: 003.01-013300-Product Data-TPO Roofing.pdf

6. Provide means and location for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. Contractor to mark submittal with electronic duplicate of typical submittal stamp.

7. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use format acceptable to Architect, containing the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor.



f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. h. Category and type of submittal. i. Submittal purpose and description. j. Specification Section number and title. k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic

name for each of multiple items. l. Drawing number and detail references, as applicable. m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. n. Related physical samples submitted directly. o. Indication of full or partial submittal. p. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. r. Other necessary identification. s. Remarks.

D. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

E. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. 1. Only deviations from Contract Documents identified and marked by Contractor

and noted as acceptable by Architect shall be incorporated into the project.

F. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent

of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from

Architect's action stamp.

G. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

H. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: 1. Format: Unless otherwise noted, provide Electronic Submittals.

B. Sequentially number transmittal forms. Mark revised submittals with original number and sequential alphabetic suffix.



C. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.

D. Allow space on submittals for Contractor and Architect/Engineer review stamps.

E. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report inability to comply with requirements.

F. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed.

G. Incomplete Submittals: Architect/Engineer will not review. Complete submittals for each item are required. Delays resulting from incomplete submittals are not the responsibility of Architect/Engineer.

H. Shop drawings will be reviewed for general conformance with the design concept. Apparent dimensional and quantitative discrepancies observed during the Architect's review will be noted for the Contractor's convenience only and should not be accepted as correct or complete or in any way understood to modify the Contractor's responsibilities in complying with the contract documents.

I. Coordination Drawings Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements.

J. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 32 00 - Construction Progress Documentation.

K. Application for Payment and Schedule of Value: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 20 00 - Price and Payment Procedures.

L. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements.

M. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements.


A. Subcontractor List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or

supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.



2.3 PRODUCT DATA

A. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment within a specification section. 1. If information must be specifically prepared for submittal because standard

published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project.

3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information.

B. Indicate product utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. Provide the following as applicable: 1. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. 2. Printed performance curves. 3. Operational range diagrams. 4. Clearances to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop

Drawings.

C. When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, to Architect/Engineer for delivery to Owner. 1. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and

special environmental criteria for application or installation.

D. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certifications by manufacturer, installation/application subcontractor, or Contractor to Architect/Engineer. 1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements.

Submit supporting reference data, affidavits and certifications as appropriate. 2. Certificates many be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but

must be acceptable to the Architect/Engineer.

E. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.

2.4 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit to Architect/Engineer for review for limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents.



B. Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

C. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.

D. When required by individual Specification Sections, provide Shop Drawings signed and sealed by a professional Engineer responsible for designing components shown on Shop Drawings. 1. Include signed and sealed calculations to support design. 2. Submit Shop Drawings and calculations in form suitable for submission to and

approval by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Make revisions and provide additional information when required by authorities

having jurisdiction.

E. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: 1. Identification of products. 2. Schedules. 3. Compliance with specified standards. 4. Notation of coordination requirements. 5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 6. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. 7. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

F. Sheet Size: Submit shop drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 x 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.

2.5 SAMPLES

A. Samples: Submit to Architect/Engineer for review for limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. 1. Submit to Architect/Engineer for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. 2. Submit samples of finishes from full range of manufacturers' standard colors,

textures, and patterns for Architect/Engineer selection. 3. Initial selections will be made from manufacturer’s color / finish charts. 4. Final selections will be made from large samples of authentic colors and finishes

produced on the intended substrate. 5. Provide number of samples as requested by the Architect.

B. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of Products, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.

C. Include identification on unexposed side of each Sample that include the following: 1. Generic description of Sample. 2. Product name and name of manufacturer. 3. Sample source. 4. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.



D. Submit three sets of Samples or number of final selection samples specified in individual specification sections; Architect/Engineer will retain two samples; remainder will be returned.

E. For projects where electronic samples are required, provide corresponding electric submittal of Sample transmittal, digital file illustrating Sample characteristics and identification information for record.

F. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

G. Samples will not be used for testing purposes unless specifically stated in specification section.

2.6 ELECTRONIC CAD FILES OF PROJECT DRAWINGS

A. Electronic CAD Files of Project Drawings: May only be used to expedite production of Shop Drawings for the Project. Use for other Projects or purposes is not allowed.

B. Electronic CAD Files of Project Drawings: Distributed only under the following conditions: 1. Use of files is solely at receiver's risk. Architect/Engineer does not warrant

accuracy of files. Receiving files in electronic form does not relieve receiver of responsibilities for measurements, dimensions, and quantities set forth in Contract Documents. In the event of ambiguity, discrepancy, or conflict between information on electronic media and that in Contract Documents, notify Architect/Engineer of discrepancy and use information in hard-copy Drawings and Specifications.

2. CAD files do not necessarily represent the latest Contract Documents, existing conditions, and as-built conditions. Receiver is responsible for determining and complying with these conditions and for incorporating addenda and modifications.

3. User is responsible for removing information not normally provided on Shop Drawings and removing references to Contract Documents. Shop Drawings submitted with information associated with other trades or with references to Contract Documents will not be reviewed and will be immediately returned.

4. Receiver shall not hold Architect/Engineer responsible for data or file clean-up required to make files usable, nor for error or malfunction in translation, interpretation, or use of this electronic information.

5. Receiver shall understand that even though Architect/Engineer has computer virus scanning software to detect presence of computer viruses, there is no guarantee that computer viruses are not present in files or in electronic media.

6. Receiver shall not hold Architect/Engineer responsible for such viruses or their consequences, and shall hold Architect/Engineer harmless against costs, losses, or damage caused by presence of computer virus in files or media.



2.7 TEST REPORTS

A. Submit for Architect/Engineer's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner.

B. Submit test reports for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents.

2.8 CERTIFICATES

A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by manufacturer, installation/application subcontractor, or Contractor to Architect/Engineer, in quantities specified for Product Data.

B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.

C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Architect/Engineer.

2.9 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, to Architect/Engineer for delivery to Owner in quantities specified for Product Data.

B. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation.

2.10 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD REPORTS

A. Submit reports for Architect/Engineer's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner.

B. Submit report in triplicate within 15 days of observation to Architect/Engineer for information.

C. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents.

2.11 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Provide digital photographs of site and construction throughout progress of Work.

B. Each month submit digital photographic files on compact disk with Application for Payment.

C. Take minimum ten site photographs and twenty interior photographs indicating relative progress of the Work, three days maximum prior to submitting.

D. Identify each digital photographic file with date.



2.12 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. The Contractor will be provided one complete set of drawings to be kept in field office for purpose of recording changes from the original contract documents. The Contractor is responsible for recording on the set any significant difference between work indicated and work actually executed. The documents shall be labeled "Record Drawings", shall be kept in a clean, dry environment, and shall be used for no other purpose. Return the Record Drawings to the Architect prior to final inspection, after all changes are recorded. Include or attach to the Record Drawings any revised drawings or addenda.

2.13 PRODUCT WARRANTIES AND PRODUCT BONDS

A. Obtain, execute and assemble transferable warranty documents and bonds from subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. See individual specification sections and section 01 7 00 for required documents.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. Action Submittals: Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action: 1. No Exceptions Taken. 2. Make Corrections Noted. 3. Revise and Resubmit. 4. Rejected.

B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

END OF SECTION


Quality Requirements 01 40 00-1

SECTION 01 40 00

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Quality control and control of installation.

B. Tolerances

C. References.

D. Testing and inspection services.

E. Manufacturers' field services.

F. Examination.

G. Preparation.

H. Repair and Protection.

I. Inspection and Testing Log.

1.2 QUALITY CONTROL AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATION

A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.

B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.

C. When manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding.

D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.

E. Perform Work by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.

F. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings or as instructed by manufacturer.

G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, or disfigurement.



1.3 TOLERANCES

A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.

B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. When manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding.

C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where specific date is established by code.

C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections.

D. When specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding.

E. Neither contractual relationships, duties, nor responsibilities of parties in Contract nor those of Architect/Engineer shall be altered from Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in reference documents.

1.5 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting as indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications as specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary

Laboratory Accreditation Program.

B. Owner will employ and pay for specified services of an independent firm to perform testing and inspection.

C. The independent firm will perform tests, inspections and other services specified in individual specification sections and as required by Architect/Engineer, Owner, and/or Authority having jurisdiction.

D. Reports will be submitted by independent firm to Architect/Engineer, Owner and Contractor, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. Include the following: 1. Date of issue.



2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record or temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and

testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies

with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

E. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, equipment, tools, storage, safe access, and assistance by incidental labor as requested. 1. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and

tests required for Contractor's use.

F. Testing and employment of testing agency or laboratory shall not relieve Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

G. Re-testing or re-inspection required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by same independent firm on instructions by Architect/Engineer. Payment for re-testing or re-inspection will be charged to Contractor by deducting testing charges from Contract Sum/Price.

H. Limits On Testing Authority: 1. Agency or laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements

of Contract Documents. 2. Agency or laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency or laboratory may not assume duties of Contractor. 4. Agency or laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.

1.6 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES

A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment, as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.

B. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect/Engineer 30 days in advance of required observations. Observer subject to approval of Architect/Engineer.

C. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work. Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Verify existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new Work being applied or attached.

C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.

D. Verify utility services are available, of correct characteristics, and in correct locations.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.

B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.

C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying new material or substance in contact or bond.

3.3 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.

3.4 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

END OF SECTION


Temporary Facilities And Controls 01 50 00-1

SECTION 01 50 00

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Temporary Utilities: 1. Temporary electricity. 2. Temporary lighting for construction purposes. 3. Temporary heating. 4. Temporary cooling. 5. Temporary ventilation. 6. Communication services. 7. Temporary water service. 8. Temporary sanitary facilities.

B. Construction Facilities: 1. Field offices and sheds. 2. Vehicular access. 3. Progress cleaning and waste removal.

C. Temporary Controls: 1. Enclosures. 2. Protection of the Work. 3. Security. 4. Facilities Protection. 5. Dust control. 6. Noise control. 7. Pest and rodent control. 8. Pollution control.

D. Removal of utilities, facilities, and controls.


A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel.

B. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire prevention program.

1.3 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY

A. Owner will pay cost of energy used. Exercise measures to conserve energy. Utilize Owner’s existing power service.



B. Complement existing power service capacity and characteristics as required for construction operations.

C. Provide flexible power cords as required for portable construction tools and equipment.

D. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction.

1.4 TEMPORARY LIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES

A. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction.

B. As required, provide and maintain lighting for construction operations.

C. Provide and maintain 1 watt/sq ft HID lighting to interior work areas after dark to exterior staging and storage areas after dark for security purposes.

D. Provide and maintain .25 watt/sq ft HID lighting to interior work areas after dark for security purposes.

E. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, lamps and the like, for specified lighting levels.

F. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.

1.5 TEMPORARY HEATING

A. Existing facilities may be used.

B. Owner will pay cost of temporary heat. Exercise measures to conserve energy. Utilize Owner's existing heat plant, extend and supplement with temporary heat devices as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations.

C. Before operating permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated, and filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters worn or consumed parts. Replace filters at Substantial Completion.

1.6 TEMPORARY COOLING

A. Existing facilities may be used.

B. Owner will pay cost of temporary cooling. Exercise measures to conserve energy. Utilize Owner's existing cooling plant, extend and supplement with temporary cooling devices as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations.

C. Before operating permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated, and filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters worn or consumed parts. Replace filters at Substantial Completion.



1.7 TEMPORARY VENTILATION

A. Ventilate enclosed areas to achieve curing of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. 1. Do not allow construction dust, fumes, vapors, or gases into adjacent occupied

areas of the facility.

B. Utilize existing ventilation equipment. Extend and supplement equipment with temporary fan units as required to maintain clean air for construction operations.

1.8 COMMUNICATION SERVICES

A. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone.

B. Internet Service: Provide, maintain and pay for broadband Internet service to field office at time of Project mobilization. Provide desktop computer with operating system and appropriate office function software and printer.

1.9 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE

A. Owner will pay cost of temporary water. Exercise measures to conserve energy. Utilize Owner's existing water system, extend and supplement with temporary devices as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations.

1.10 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES

A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Existing facility use is not permitted. Provide facilities at time of Project mobilization.

B. Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. Coordinate location with Owner.

1.11 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS

A. Field Offices, General: The Owner shall arrange a space in the building for Progress Meetings. Contractor to provide facilities as necessary to maintain required documents on site.

B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations as necessary.

1.12 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposure.



1.13 VEHICULAR ACCESS

A. Traffic Controls: 1. Protect existing site improvements including curbs, pavement and utilities. 2. Provide unimpeded access for emergency vehicles. 3. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants and control valves free of

obstructions.

B. Parking: On-site parking will be designated by the Owner for use by construction personnel.

1.14 PROGRESS CLEANING AND WASTE REMOVAL

A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site and premises in clean and orderly condition.

B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, crawl spaces and other closed or remote spaces, before enclosing spaces.

C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust.

D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site.

E. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.15 ENCLOSURES

A. Exterior Enclosures: 1. Provide temporary insulated weather tight closure of exterior openings to

accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks.

B. Interior Enclosures: 1. Provide temporary partitions to separate work areas from Owner occupied areas,

to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner occupied areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment.

2. Construction: Framing and reinforced polyethylene or gypsum board sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces: a. STC rating of 35 in accordance with ASTM E90 where required by

Owner. b. Maximum flame spread rating of 25 in accordance with ASTM E84.

3. Paint surfaces exposed to view from Owner occupied areas.



1.16 SECURITY

A. Security Program: 1. Protect Work and Owner's operations from theft, vandalism, and unauthorized

entry. 2. Initiate program in coordination with Owner's existing security system at project

mobilization. 3. Maintain program throughout construction period until Owner acceptance

precludes need for Contractor security.

B. Entry Control: 1. Restrict entrance of persons and vehicles into Project site and existing facilities. 2. Allow entrance only to authorized persons with proper identification. 3. Maintain log of workers and visitors, make available to Owner on request. 4. Owner will control entrance of persons and vehicles related to Owner's

operations.

1.17 FACILITIES PROTECTION

A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.

B. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. comply with NFPA 241; manage fire prevention program. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and

similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

1.18 DUST CONTROL

A. Execute Work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations.

B. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere.

1.19 NOISE CONTROL

A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction operations.

1.20 PEST AND RODENT CONTROL

A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects from entering facility.



B. Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents from accessing or invading premises.

1.21 POLLUTION CONTROL

A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations.

B. Comply with pollution and environmental control requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.22 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS

A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion inspection.

B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.

C. Restore existing and permanent facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used.

END OF SECTION


Product Requirements 01 60 00-1

SECTION 01 60 00

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Products.

B. Product delivery requirements.

C. Product storage and handling requirements.

D. Product options.

E. Product substitution procedures.

F. Equipment electrical characteristics and components.

1.2 PRODUCTS

A. Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and new at time of installation.

B. Furnish products of qualified manufacturers suitable for intended use. Furnish products of each type by single manufacturer unless specified otherwise.

C. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by Contract Documents.

D. Furnish interchangeable components from same manufacturer for components being replaced.

E. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

F. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS

A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.



C. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged.

D. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.

1.4 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS

A. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

B. Store with seals and labels intact and legible.

C. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product.

D. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.

E. Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection.

F. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products.

G. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter.

H. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.

I. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.

1.5 PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those standards or description.

B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of one of the manufacturer’s named, a product meeting the specifications or a product equivalent to the named product. Requests for substitutions shall be submitted in accordance with the following article.

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.



1.6 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

A. Comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures.

B. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on Shop Drawing or Product Data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to Contract Documents.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS

A. Wiring Terminations: Furnish terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Include lugs for terminal box.

B. Cord and Plug: Furnish minimum 6 foot cord and plug including grounding connector for connection to electric wiring system. Cord of longer length is specified in individual specification sections.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used.

END OF SECTION


Execution Requirements 01 70 00-1

SECTION 01 70 00

EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Closeout procedures.

B. Final cleaning.

C. Starting of systems.

D. Demonstration and instructions.

E. Testing, adjusting and balancing.

F. Protecting installed construction.

G. Project record documents.

H. Operation and maintenance data.

I. Spare parts and maintenance products.

J. Product warranties and product bonds.

K. Maintenance service.

1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having

jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work an access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates and similar releases.

2. Submit closeout submittals, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.



3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications and similar documents.

4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with Manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

5. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 6. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 7. Perform preventative maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial

Completion. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with

mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touch up painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate

visual defects.

C. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificates will be issued. 1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work indentified in previous

inspections as incomplete is complete or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final

completion.

1.3 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment. 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's

Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment and maintenance of products, equipment and inspection.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare final Certificate of Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.



1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. use CSI Form 14.1A. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: 1. PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated copy.

1.5 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Complete the Work in accordance with time requirements stipulated in the Construction Contract.

B. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect/Engineer's review.

C. Provide submittals to Architect/Engineer Owner required by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due.

1.6 FINAL CLEANING

A. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment. 1. Employ experienced personnel or professional cleaning firm.

B. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.

C. Clean equipment and fixtures to sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to surface and material being cleaned.

D. Replace filters of operating equipment.

E. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from site.

1.7 STARTING OF SYSTEMS

A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.

B. Notify Architect/Engineer seven days prior to start-up of each item.



C. Verify each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions which may cause damage.

D. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by equipment or system manufacturer.

E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.

F. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable manufacturer's representative and/or Contractors' personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.

H. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01 33 00 that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly.

1.8 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS

A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of Substantial Completion.

B. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.

C. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled time, at equipment location.

D. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction.

E. Required instruction time for each item of equipment and system is specified in individual sections.

1.9 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform services specified per HVAC specifications.

1.10 PROTECTING INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.

B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage.



C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.

D. Protect finished floors, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.

1.11 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.

B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.

C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.

D. Record information concurrent with construction progress, not less than weekly.

E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.

F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Include Contract modifications such as Addenda, supplementary instructions,

change directives, field orders, minor changes in the Work, and change orders. 2. Include locations of concealed elements of the Work. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in

construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original Contract drawings. 6. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing, include the designation

"PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

G. Submit PDF electronic files of marked-up documents to Architect/Engineer with claim for final Application for Payment.

1.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit in PDF composite electronic indexed file.

B. Submit data bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch (A4) text pages, three D side ring capacity expansion binders with durable plastic covers.



C. Prepare binder cover with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required.

D. Internally subdivide binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.

E. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages.

F. Contents: Prepare Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description identified, typed on white paper, in three parts as follows: 1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of

Architect/Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and

subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: a. Significant design criteria. b. List of equipment. c. Parts list for each component. d. Operating instructions. e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. f. Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning

methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.

3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: a. Shop drawings and product data. b. Certificates. c. Photocopies of warranties and bonds.

1.13 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS

A. Furnish spare parts, maintenance, and extra products in quantities specified in individual specification sections.

B. Deliver to Project site and place in location as directed by Owner; obtain receipt prior to final payment.

1.14 PRODUCT WARRANTIES AND PRODUCT BONDS

A. Obtain warranties and bonds executed in triplicate by responsible subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of applicable item of work.

B. Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents and bonds from subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers.

C. Verify documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.



D. Co-execute submittals when required.

E. Include Table of Contents and assemble in three D side ring binder with durable plastic cover. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf

binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2 by 11 inch paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic -covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address and telephone number of the installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name and name of Contractor.

F. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

G. Submit prior to final Application for Payment.

H. Time Of Submittals: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during

construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within ten days after acceptance.

2. Make other submittals within ten days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment.

3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as beginning of warranty or bond period.

1.15 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Furnish service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections.

B. Examine system components at frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required.

C. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by manufacturer of original component.

D. Do not assign or transfer maintenance service to agent or Subcontractor without prior written consent of Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.



PART 3 EXECUTION

Not Used.

END OF SECTION


Selective Structure Demolition 02 41 19-1

SECTION 02 41 19

SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Demolishing designated building equipment and fixtures. 2. Demolishing designated construction. 3. Cutting and alterations for completion of the Work. 4. Removing designated items for reuse and Owner’s retention. 5. Protecting items designated to remain. 6. Removing demolished materials.

1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for submittals.

B. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities, concealed utilities discovered during demolition and subsurface obstructions.


A. Conform to applicable code for demolition work, dust control, products requiring electrical disconnection and re-connection.

B. Conform to applicable code for procedures when hazardous or contaminated materials are discovered.

C. Obtain required permits from authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 SEQUENCING

A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Requirements for sequencing.

B. Owner may conduct salvage operations before demolition begins to remove materials Owner chooses to retain.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger and notify Architect/Engineer. Do not resume operations until directed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS



Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas indicated to be demolished before demolition.

B. Determine where removals may result in structural deficiency or unplanned building collapse during demolition. Coordinate demolition sequence and procedures to prevent structures from becoming unstable.

C. Determine where demolition may affect structural integrity or weather resistance of adjacent buildings indicated to remain. 1. Identify measures required to protect buildings from damage. 2. Identify remedial work including patching, repairing, bracing, and other work

required to leave buildings indicated to remain in structurally sound and weathertight and watertight condition.

D. Verify hazardous material abatement is complete before beginning demolition.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Call Local Utility Line Information service not less than three working days before performing Work. 1. Request underground utilities to be located and marked within and surrounding

construction areas.

B. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements.

C. Mark location and termination of utilities.

D. Erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices, including warning signs and lights, and similar measures, for protection of the public, Owner, and existing improvements indicated to remain.

E. Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings.

F. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, odors, and noise to non-renovated areas adjacent to construction.

G. Prevent movement of structure; provide temporary bracing and shoring required to ensure safety of existing structure.

H. Provide appropriate temporary signage including signage for exit or building egress.

I. Do not close or obstruct building egress path.



J. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without 3 days prior written notice to Owner.

3.3 SALVAGE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate with Owner to identify building components and equipment required to be removed and delivered to Owner.

B. Tag components and equipment Owner designates for salvage.

C. Protect designated salvage items from demolition operations until items can be removed.

D. Carefully remove building components and equipment indicated to be salvaged.

E. Disassemble as required to permit removal from building.

F. Package small and loose parts to avoid loss.

G. Mark equipment and packaged parts to permit identification and consolidation of components of each salvaged item.

H. Prepare assembly instructions consistent with disassembled parts. Package assembly instructions in protective envelope and securely attach to each disassembled salvaged item.

I. Deliver salvaged items to Owner. Obtain signed receipt from Owner.

3.4 DEMOLITION

A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent building areas.

B. Maintain protected egress from and access to adjacent existing buildings at all times.

C. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permits.

D. Cease operations immediately when structure appears to be in danger and notify Architect/Engineer.

E. Disconnect and remove designated utilities within demolition areas.

F. Cap and identify abandoned utilities at termination points when utility is not completely removed. Annotate Record Drawings indicating location and type of service for capped utilities remaining after demolition.

G. Demolish in orderly and careful manner. Protect existing improvements and supporting structural members.

H. Carefully remove building components indicated to be reused. 1. Disassemble components as required to permit removal.



2. Package small and loose parts to avoid loss. 3. Mark components and packaged parts to permit reinstallation. 4. Store components, protected from construction operations, until reinstalled.

I. Remove demolished materials from site except where specifically noted otherwise. Do not burn or bury materials on site.

J. Remove materials as Work progresses. Upon completion of Work, leave areas in clean condition.

K. Remove temporary Work.

END OF SECTION


Concrete Reinforcing 03 20 00 - 1

SECTION 03 20 00

CONCRETE REINFORCING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Reinforcing bars. 2. Welded wire fabric. 3. Reinforcement accessories.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 3. ACI 530.1 - Specifications for Masonry Structures. 4. ACI SP-66 - ACI Detailing Manual.

B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A82/A82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete

Reinforcement. 2. A185/A185M-07 Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for

Concrete. 3. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement.

C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS D1.4 - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel.

D. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute: 1. CRSI - Manual of Standard Practice. 2. CRSI - Placing Reinforcing Bars.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate bar sizes, spacings, locations, and quantities of reinforcing steel and welded wire fabric, bending and cutting schedules, and supporting and spacing devices.

C. Certificates: Submit AWS qualification certificate for welders employed on the Work.



D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1. Submit certified copies of mill test report of reinforcement materials analysis.


A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Welders: AWS qualified within previous 12 months.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, 60 ksi yield grade, deformed billet bars, galvanized finish.

B. Plain Wire: ASTM A1064; galvanized finish.

C. Welded Plain Wire Fabric: ASTM A1064; in flat sheets; galvanized finish.

2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gage annealed type.

B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during concrete placement conditions including load bearing pad on bottom to prevent vapor retarder puncture.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate concrete reinforcement in accordance with ACI 318 and applicable code.

B. Weld reinforcement in accordance with AWS D1.4.

C. Galvanized Reinforcement: Clean surfaces, weld and re-protect welded joint in accordance with CRSI.

D. Locate reinforcement splices not indicated on Drawings, at point of minimum stress.

2.4 SHOP FINISHING

A. Galvanized Finish for Steel Bars: ASTM A767/A767M, Class II, hot dip galvanized after fabrication.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PLACEMENT

A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position beyond specified tolerance. 1. Do not weld crossing reinforcement bars for assembly except as permitted by

Architect/Engineer.

B. Do not displace or damage vapor retarder.

C. Accommodate placement of formed openings.

D. Space reinforcement bars with minimum clear spacing in accordance with ACI 318 or one bar diameter, but not less than 1 inch. 1. Where bars are indicated in multiple layers, place upper bars directly above lower bars.

E. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcement in accordance with ACI 318 and applicable code.

F. Splice reinforcing in accordance with splicing device manufacturer’s instructions.

3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.

B. Install reinforcement within the following tolerances for flexural members, walls, and compression members:

Reinforcement Depth Depth Tolerance Concrete Cover Tolerance

Greater than 8 inches plus or minus 3/8 inch minus 3/8 inch

Less than 8 inches plus or minus 1/2 inch minus 1/2 inch

C. Install reinforcement within the tolerances specified in ACI 530.1 for foundation walls.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Field inspection and testing will be performed by Owner’s testing laboratory in accordance with ACI 318 and applicable code.

C. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm.

END OF SECTION


Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 1

SECTION 03 30 00

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete for the following: 1. Slabs on grade and repairs to existing slabs after demolition work. 2. Equipment pads. 3. Control, expansion and contraction joint devices.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 20 00 – Price and Payment Procedures: Add Alternate 2. Section 32 00 00 - Concrete Reinforcing. 3. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Protection.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 305R- Standard Specification for Hot Weather Concreting. 3. ACI 306.1 - Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting. 4. ACI 308.1 - Standard Specification for Curing Concrete. 5. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.

B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 2. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical

Concrete Specimens. 3. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 4. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 5. ASTM C172 - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 6. ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact

with Earth or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs. 7. ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact

with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit data on joint devices, attachment accessories, admixtures and vapor retarder.

C. Design Data:



1. Submit concrete mix design for each concrete strength. Submit separate mix designs when admixtures are required for the following: a. Hot and cold weather concrete work. b. Air entrained concrete work.

2. Identify mix ingredients and proportions, including admixtures. 3. Identify chloride content of admixtures and whether or not chloride was added during

manufacture.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation procedures and interface required with adjacent Work.


A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301.

B. Conform to ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.

C. Conform to ACI 306.1 when concreting during cold weather.

D. Acquire cement and aggregate from one source for Work.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.

B. Maintain concrete temperature after installation at minimum 50 degrees F for minimum 7 days.

C. Maintain high early strength concrete temperature after installation at minimum 50 degrees F for minimum 3 days.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B. Coordinate placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I/II. 1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F. 2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 120.

B. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33. 1. Coarse Aggregate Maximum Size: 3/4 inches. 2. Fine aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.



C. Water: ACI 318; potable, without deleterious amounts of chloride ions.

D. Add Alternate: Concrete Infill at Masonry Openings for Wood Athletic Flooring alternate. 1. Exterior Concrete Topping: Self-leveling Portland cement-based topping. 2. Priming / bonding agent and aggregates suitable for 2” thickness as recommended by

topping manufacturer. 3. Compressive Strength: 4,300 psi per ASTM C109. 4. Product Quality Standard: Ardex K 301, or approved equivalent.

2.2 ADMIXTURES

A. Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete.

B. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

C. Furnish materials in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation.

D. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260.

E. Chemicals: ASTM C494/C494M. 1. Type A - Water Reducing. 2. Type D - Water Reducing and Retarding. 3. Type E - Water Reducing and Accelerating. 4. Type F - Water Reducing, High Range.

F. Plasticizing & Retarding: ASTM C1017/C1017M Type II.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Form Materials: 1. Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least

two edges and one side for tight fit. 2. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,

stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces

B. Bonding Agent: Latex emulsion or component modified epoxy resin. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Euclid Chemical. b. Dayton Superior. c. Master Builders..

C. Vapor Retarder: ASTM E1745 Class A; 10 mil thick fabric reinforced plastic film type recommended for below grade application. Furnish joint tape recommended by manufacturer. 1. Manufacturers:

a. W. R. Meadows. b. Reef Industries. c. Stego Industries.



D. Non-Shrink Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M; premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2,400 psi in 48 hours and 7,000 psi in 28 days 30 minute minimum working time.

E. Curing Materials: 1. Moisture Retaining Cover: ASTM C-171 9 oz./C.4. 2. Curing and Sealing Compound: Clear, waterborne membrane-forming liquid complying

ASTM C309, Type I, Class B, or ASTM C 1315, Type I, Class A - certified to not interfere with floor cover bonding agent.

2.4 EXTERIOR JOINT AND FILLER MATERIALS

A. Joint Filler: Asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, ½ inch thick unless otherwise noted.

B. Sealant: ASTM D6690, Type I

2.5 CONCRETE MIX

A. Select proportions for concrete in accordance with ACI 318 trial mixtures or field experience; select proportions for surge tank based upon water cement ratio specified.

B. Provide concrete to the following criteria:

Material and Property Measurement

Compressive Strength (28 day) Slabs: 3,500 psi

Cement Type ASTM C150, Type I

Aggregate Type Normal weight

Water-Cement Ratio (maximum) 0.53 by weight

Aggregate Size (maximum) ¾ inch

Fly Ash Content: 20 percent of cementitious materials by weight, maximum

Slump 4 inches plus or minus 1 inch

C. Admixtures: Include admixture types and quantities indicated in concrete mix designs only when approved by Architect/Engineer. 1. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather

placement requirements. 2. Do not use calcium chloride nor admixtures containing calcium chloride. 3. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather. 4. Add air entrainment admixture to concrete mix for work exposed to freezing and thawing or

deicing chemicals. 5. For concrete exposed to deicing chemicals, limit fly ash, pozzolans, silica fume, and slag

content as required by applicable code.



D. Average Compressive Strength Reduction: Permitted in accordance with ACI 318.

E. Ready Mixed Concrete: Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement.

C. Verify anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with placing concrete.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate required slab depressions for recessed flooring systems to be installed.

B. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent. Remove laitance, coatings, and unsound materials.

C. Construct forms to correct shape and dimensions, mortar-tight, braced, and of sufficient strength to maintain shape and position under imposed loads from construction operations. 1. Coordinate with Work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets,

recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other Work.

D. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout.

E. Remove debris and ice from formwork, reinforcement, and concrete substrates.

F. Remove water from areas receiving concrete before concrete is placed.

G. Quality Control Notification: 1. Owner may engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and

inspections and prepare test reports of concrete. 2. Notify Owner’s testing laboratory 24 hours prior to commencement of operations. 3. Inspections:

a. Steel reinforcement placement. b. Headed bolts and studs. c. Verify use of required design mixture. d. Concrete placement. e. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.

3.3 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301.



B. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed expansion and contraction joints are not disturbed during concrete placement.

C. Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade in accordance with ASTM E1643. Lap joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight by taping edges and ends.

D. Repair vapor retarder damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with vapor retarder material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches and seal watertight.

E. Joints: 1. Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. 2. Separate interior slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with bond breaking joint strips full

width and height of joints; terminate flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated..

3. Construction Joints: Install construction joint devices in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.

4. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas per best practice recommendations of ACI. Construct contraction joints as follows: a. Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or

diamond-rimmed blades. b. Cut 1/8-inch wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or

otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. c. Depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness.

5. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where needed to accommodate horizontal movement, but limit vertical movement.. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

6. Install joint device anchors. Maintain correct position to allow joint cover to be flush with floor and wall finish.

F. Install joint covers in one piece length, when adjacent construction activity is complete.

G. Deposit concrete at final position. Prevent segregation of mix. Place concrete in continuous operation for each panel or section determined by predetermined joints.

H. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around

reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface

plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.



I. Place floor slabs in saw cut pattern indicated. Saw cut joints as soon as possible without raveling joints. Minimum depth 1 inch.

J. Screed floors and slabs on grade level, maintaining surface flatness of Ff of 20.

K. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads.

3.4 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. Provide formed concrete surfaces to be left exposed with smooth rubbed finish.

B. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, re-straightening and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

C. Steel trowel surfaces that are indicated to receive carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring or be exposed.

D. Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.

E. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at 1/8 inch per foot nominal, or as indicated on drawings.

3.5 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperature per ACI 301 (Hot) or 306 Cold Protection. 1. Protect fresh exposed concrete from freezing for minimum 7 days.

B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.

C. Cure concrete in accordance with ACI 308.1 using wet cure or chemical cure method.

D. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture retaining cover. Maintain moisture and repair holes for 7 days.

E. Apply uniformly chemical curing compound per manufacturer’s written instructions, repeat as required. Use compound compatible with finish adhesive or slab sealant or remove after cure is complete.

F. Cure floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301 for wet cure or chemical cure.

G. Concrete Sealer: Where concrete slabs are scheduled to be left exposed, apply curing and sealing compound in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.



3.6 PATCHING

A. Allow Architect/Engineer to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms.

B. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Architect/Engineer upon discovery.

C. Patch imperfections as directed by Architect/Engineer.

3.7 TOPPING - ALTERNATE

A. Form, prime and place topping product, with appropriate aggregate for thickness, in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions.

B. Air cure and seal for use as door sill in-fills per manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.8 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE

A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements.

B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by Architect/Engineer.

C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect/Engineer for each individual area.

END OF SECTION


Masonry Mortaring and Grouting 04 05 03-1

SECTION 04 05 03

MASONRY MORTARING AND GROUTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes mortar and grout for masonry.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 01 11 - Maintenance of Masonry 2. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Installation of mortar and grout.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. 2. ACI 530.1 - Specifications for Masonry Structures.

B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 2. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 3. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 4. ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout. 5. ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal requirements.

B. Samples: Submit two samples of mortar, illustrating mortar color and color range.

C. Design Data: Submit design mix when Property specification of ASTM C270 is to be used, required environmental conditions, and admixture limitations.

D. Test Reports: 1. Submit reports on mortar indicating conformance of component mortar materials

to requirements of ASTM C270. 2. Submit reports on grout indicating conformance of component grout materials to

requirements of ASTM C476.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.




A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1.


A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Cold Weather Requirements: In accordance with ACI 530/530.1 when ambient temperature or temperature of masonry units is less than 40 degrees F.

C. Hot Weather Requirements: In accordance with ACI 530/530.1 when ambient temperature is greater than 100 degrees F or ambient temperature is greater than 90 degrees F with wind velocity greater than 8 mph.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPONENTS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I.

B. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type for CMU work

C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C206, Type S.

D. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404, fine and coarse.

E. Water: Clean and potable.

F. Water Repellent: Granular or liquid type; product as recommended by concrete masonry unit manufacturer.

G. Mortar Color Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.

H. Calcium chloride is not permitted.

2.2 MIXES

A. Mortar Mixes: 1. Mortar For Structural Masonry: ASTM C270, Type S using Proportion

specification. 2. Mortar For Non-Structural Masonry: ASTM C270, Type N using Proportion

specification.

B. Mortar Colors: 1. Concrete Masonry Units: Natural color.



C. Mortar Mixing: 1. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C270 in quantities

needed for immediate use. 2. Achieve uniformly damp sand immediately before mixing process. 3. Add mortar color and admixtures to achieve uniformity of mix and coloration. 4. Re-temper only within two hours of mixing.

D. Grout Mixes: 1. Grout for Structural Masonry: 2,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-11 inches slump;

mixed in accordance with ASTM C476 Fine or Coarse grout. 2. Application:

a. Coarse Grout: For grouting spaces with minimum 4 inches dimension in every direction.

b. Fine Grout: For grouting other spaces.

E. Grout Mixing: 1. Mix grout in accordance with ASTM C94, modified to use ingredients complying

with ASTM C476. 2. Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in

accordance with ASTM C476. 3. Add admixtures; mix uniformly.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Request inspection of spaces to be grouted.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Apply bonding agent to existing surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install mortar and grout in accordance with ACI 530.1 Specifications for Masonry Structures.


A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Testing and Inspection Services. 1. Refer to Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry for requirements.

3.5 SCHEDULES

A. Exterior Walls: 1. Concrete Masonry Unit Wall : Type S mortar.



B. Interior Walls: 1. Interior Reinforced / Load-Bearing Masonry Partitions: Type S mortar. 2. Interior Non Load-Bearing Masonry Partitions: Type N mortar.

END OF SECTION


Unit Masonry 04 20 00-1

SECTION 04 20 00

UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. New masonry work, reinforcement, anchorages and accessories. 2. Repointing of mortar joints. 3. Repair of damaged masonry.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 05 03 - Masonry Mortar and Grout. 2. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping. 3. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Protection.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. 2. ACI 530.1 - Specifications for Masonry Structures.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM A82/A82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete

Reinforcement. 2. ASTM A153/A153M - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 3. ASTM A240/A240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-

Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications.

4. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength.

5. ASTM A580/A580M - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire. 6. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-

Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 7. ASTM A641/A641M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)

Carbon Steel Wire. 8. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 9. ASTM A951 - Standard Specification for Masonry Joint Reinforcement. 10. ASTM B695 - Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically

Deposited on Iron and Steel. 11. ASTM C55 - Standard Specification for Concrete Brick. 12. ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units. 13. ASTM C129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry

Units.



14. ASTM C140 - Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units.

15. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

16. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit data for masonry units and fabricated wire reinforcement, wall ties, anchors and other accessories.

C. Samples: Submit samples of each type of masonry unit to illustrate color, texture and extremes of color range.


A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530 Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures and ACI 530.1 Specification for Masonry Structures.

B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Where fire resistance ratings are indicated for masonry work, provide materials and construction that have been tested and found to be in compliance with ASTM E119 by a recognized building and/or fire official having jurisdiction.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum five years experience.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

B. Accept masonry units on site. Inspect for damage.



B. Cold Weather Requirements: In accordance with ACI 530.1 when ambient temperature or temperature of masonry units is less than 40 degrees F.

C. Hot Weather Requirements: In accordance with ACI 530.1 when ambient temperature is greater than 100 degrees F or ambient temperature is greater than 90 degrees F with wind velocity greater than 8 mph.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MASONRY UNITS

A. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): ASTM C90; lightweight. 1. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): 1,500 psi minimum net area compressive

strength.

B. Concrete Brick Units: ASTM C55, of same Grade, Type, and Weight as block units.

C. Concrete Masonry Unit Size and Shape: 1. Nominal modular size of 8 x 8 x 16 inches, unless otherwise noted. 2. Provide special shapes for lintels, bond beams, corners, jambs, sash, control

joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 3. Provide bullnose CMU units for outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.

a. Furnish bullnose units starting at second course above finished floor.

D. Brick: Face brick of similar size and texture to those on existing, exterior pilasters.

2.2 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENTS AND ANCHORAGE ACCESSORIES

A. General: ASTM A951 and as follows: 1. Mill galvanized, carbon-steel wire for interior walls. 2. Hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel wire for exterior walls. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter for standard weight,

W2.8 or 0.188-inch diameter for heavy weight. Provide “standard” weight unless indicated otherwise.

4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter for both standard and heavy weight.

5. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units.

B. Single and Multi-Wythe Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A951; ladder type; steel wire, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A641/A641M after fabrication, 3/16 inch side rods with 9 gauge cross ties.

C. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, 60 ksi yield grade, deformed billet bars, uncoated finish.

D. Strap Anchors: A36 bent steel shape, 1/8 inch size x 1 1/2" inch thick, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M B2 finish.

E. Intersecting Wall Ties: 1/2" x 1/2" mesh, 16 gage hot dip galvanized wire mesh units; 12" or 16" length x width to suit masonry wall.

F. Anchor Bolts: Headed, J-shaped or L-shaped.

G. Dowels: Stainless steel.



2.3 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES

A. Mortar and Grout: As specified in Section 04 05 03.

B. Preformed Control Joints: Rubber material. Furnish with corner and tee accessories.

C. Joint Filler: Closed cell neoprene.

D. Building Paper: ASTM D226, No. 15 asphalt saturated felt.

E. Cleaning Solution: 1. Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. 2. Use detergent and masonry cleaners recommended by masonry manufacturers.

F. Precast Concrete Lintels: Type, size, as indicated on Drawings, 3,000 psi strength at 28 days.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Testing, inspection and analysis requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: coordination and project conditions.

B. Visit the site and determine extend of miscellaneous repair work; notations on Drawings draw attention of example areas and situations, but are not intended to be a comprehensive listing or definition of needed masonry repair work.

C. Verify field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.

D. Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located.

E. Verify built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other sections.

B. Furnish temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent support.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.



B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form bed and head joints of uniform thickness.

C. Coursing of Concrete and Decorative Masonry Units: 1. Bond: Running. For exposed masonry do not use units with less than nominal 4-

inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jamb. 2. Mortar Joints: Concave.

D. Placing And Bonding: 1. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints. 2. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. 3. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not

permitted. 4. Remove excess mortar as work progresses. 5. Interlock intersections and external corners. 6. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where

adjustment is required, remove mortar and replace. 7. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to assure straight,

clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. 8. Cut mortar joints flush where wall tile is scheduled, resilient base is scheduled,

cavity insulation vapor barrier adhesive is applied, sheet waterproofing is applied or bitumen dampproofing is applied.

9. Isolate masonry from vertical structural framing members with movement joint. 10. Isolate top of masonry from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or

decks with compressible joint filler.

E. Fire-Rated Masonry Construction: 1. Install fire-rated masonry in compliance with requirements of ASTM E119 and

with the hourly rating indicated on the Drawings.

F. Bond Breaks: 1. General: Install a layer of No. 15 asphalt saturated felt in horizontal joints to

function as a bond break between courses of masonry where indicated.

G. Joint Reinforcement - Single Wythe Masonry: 1. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches oc. 2. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and

below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. 3. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls. 4. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. 5. Reinforce joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches oc. 6. Reinforce stack bonded unit joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16

inches oc.

H. Anchoring Masonry to Structural Members: Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: 1. For concealed applications only, provide an open space not less than 1 inch in

width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid materials.



2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure.

3. Space anchors not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches o.c. horizontally.

I. Lintels: 1. Install loose steel or precast concrete lintels over openings as indicated. 2. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings in non-load bearing walls

where steel or precast concrete lintels are not scheduled or indicated. 3. Do not splice reinforcing bars. 4. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. 5. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. 6. Allow masonry lintels to attain specified strength before removing temporary

supports. 7. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of opening.

J. Grouted Components: 1. Reinforce bond beam as indicated, 1 inch from bottom web. 2. Lap splices bar diameters required by code. 3. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. 4. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. 5. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for minimum 12 inches both

sides of opening.

K. Reinforced Masonry: 1. Lay masonry units with cells vertically aligned and cavities between wythes clear

of mortar and unobstructed. 2. Place reinforcement bars as indicated on Drawings. 3. Support and secure reinforcement from displacement. 4. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. 5. Place grout in accordance to ACI 530.1.

L. Control And Expansion Joints: 1. Install joints in masonry in locations indicated below and where indicated on

drawings. Final locations of joints to be approved by Architect. a. Place joints 2 feet to 8 feet from each exterior corner of the building. b. Exterior Walls: 20 feet on center and within 24 inches on one side of

each interior and exterior corner. c. Interior Walls: 30 feet on center. d. Place joints at abutments of walls and columns. e. Install joints at locations where wall height or thickness changes by more

than 20 percent. f. Place joints in supporting structure. g. At major openings, place joints at end of lintels upward and below at

ends of sills downward. h. For openings less than 6 feet wide, place joints on one side of openings. i. For openings more than 6 feet wide, place joints at both sides of

openings.



j. Place compression joints to underside of relief angles supporting masonry.

2. Between masonry and structural members, keep 1/2-inch control joint free of mortar and other rigid materials.

3. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints.

4. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints.

5. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07 90 00 for sealant performance. 6. Form expansion joint by omitting mortar and cutting unit to form open space.

M. Built-In Work: 1. As work progresses, install built-in metal door and glazed frames, fabricated

metal frames, brick vents, miscellaneous grilles / louvers, anchor bolts, plates, and other items to be built-in the work and furnished by other sections.

2. Install built-in items plumb and level. 3. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame

voids solid with grout or mortar. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings.

4. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.

5. Do not build in materials subject to deterioration. 6. At fire-rated and smoke partitions, provide safing/firestopping in joint between

top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Division 07.

N. Cutting And Fitting: 1. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves and grounds. Coordinate with other

sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. 2. Obtain Architect/Engineer’s approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not

indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired.

O. New Openings and Repairs of Existing Masonry Work: 1. Cut-out an fit existing CMU masonry for new ductwork, pipes, conduit, sleeves

and related new construction. 2. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and

location. 3. Repair damaged areas of or voids in existing masonry, both interior and exterior

work. Cut out and replace units were necessary and tuck-point damaged mortar joints.



B. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch.

C. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more.



D. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more.

E. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft; 1/2 inch in 30 ft.

F. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft.

G. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch.

H. Maximum Variation for Steel Reinforcement: 1. Plus or minus 1/2 inch when distance from centerline of steel to opposite face of

masonry is 8 inches or less. 2. Plus or minus 1 inch when distance is between 8 and 24 inches. 3. Plus or minus 1 1/4 inch when distance is greater than 24 inches. 4. Plus or minus 2 inches from location along face of wall.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Final cleaning.

B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.

C. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.

D. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.

E. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.

3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished Work.

B. Protect exposed external corners subject to damage.

C. Protect base of walls from mud and mortar splatter.

D. Protect masonry and other items built into masonry walls from mortar droppings and staining caused by mortar.

E. Protect tops of masonry work with waterproof coverings secured in place without damaging masonry. Provide coverings where masonry is exposed to weather when work is not in progress.

END OF SECTION


Metal Railings 05 52 00-1

SECTION 05 52 00

METAL RAILINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes handrails.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Execution requirements for placement of

anchors, as specified in this Section, in masonry. 2. Section 09 90 00 - Paints and Coatings: Field applied paint finish.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,

Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. 2. ASTM A85 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric. 3. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)

Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 4. ASTM A500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless

Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 5. ASTM A501 - Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural

Tubing. 6. ASTM A853 - Standard Specification For Steel Wire, Carbon, for General Use. 7. ASTM B241 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy

Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube. 8. ASTM E935 - Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal

Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings. 9. ASTM E985 - Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings.

B. National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association: 1. NOMMA Guideline 1 - Joint Finishes.

C. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings: 1. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Manual. 2. SSPC Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Paint. 3. SSPC Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I - Inorganic and Type II - Organic).

D. ASCE 7 (American Society of Civil Engineers) - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Railing assembly, wall rails, and attachments to withstand structural loads required by ASCE 7 without damage or permanent set.



1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories.

C. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within previous 12 months.



B. Accept metal fabrications on site in labeled shipments. Inspect for damage.

C. Protect metal fabrications from damage by exposure to weather.


A. Perform Work in accordance with ASTM E985 - Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings.

B. Finish joints in accordance with NOMMA Guideline 1.

1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.

1.8 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify field measurements of existing stair with new finishes prior to fabrication. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Design handrail and attachments to resist forces as required by ASTM E985. Apply loads non-simultaneously to produce maximum stress. 1. Guard Top Rail and Handrail Concentrated Load: 200 lb. applied to any point in

any direction. 2. Guard Top Rail Uniform Load: 20 plf applied in any direction.

B. All miscellaneous bolts and anchors shall be provided as part of this section of the specifications; such devices not shown in detail on the drawings shall be as to conform to the accepted practices of the trade.



2.2 MATERIALS - STEEL

A. Rails: 1-1/2 inch diameter steel pipe; welded joints.

B. Fittings: Elbows, T-shapes, wall brackets, escutcheons; cast steel.

C. Mounting: Brackets and flanges with steel brackets for embedding into masonry.

D. Exposed Fasteners: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; consistent with design of railing.

E. Paint: Selected from fabricator's standard primers to be compatible with finish coats of paint. Coordinate selection of metal primer with finish paint requirements specified in Division 9.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.

B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.

C. Continuously seal joined members continuous welds.

D. Interior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by continuous welds.

E. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.

F. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise.

G. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise.

H. Accurately form components required for anchorage of railings to each other and to building structure.

I. Form handrails from maximum, 1-1/2 inch actual outside diameter, steel sections.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive Work.

C. Verify measurements in field for work fabricated to fit job conditions.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.

B. Supply steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates to appropriate sections.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.

B. Dissimilar Metals: Take precautions to prevent the occurrence of electrolytic action between dissimilar metals.

C. Field bolt and weld to match shop bolting and welding. Conceal bolts and screws whenever possible. Where not concealed, use flush countersunk fastenings.

END OF SECTION


Rough Carpentry

06 10 00-1

SECTION 06 10 00

ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Structural framing.

2. Stage platform subflooring.

3. Floor sheathing.

4. Fire-retardant treatment of wood.

5. Miscellaneous wood framing and sheathing.

6. Telephone and electrical panel back boards.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Wood Protection Association:

1. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood.

B. ASTM International:

1. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on

Iron and Steel Hardware.

2. ASTM B695 - Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically

Deposited on Iron and Steel

3. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials.

4. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction

and Materials.

5. ASTM F1667 - Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and

Staples.

C. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau:

1. SPIB - Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber.

D. U.S. Department of Commerce National Institute of Standards and Technology:

1. DOC PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood.

2. DOC PS 2 - Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels.

3. DOC PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit technical data on wood preservative and fire retardant treatment

materials and application instructions.


Rough Carpentry

06 10 00-2


A. Perform Work in accordance with the following:

1. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by DOC PS 20.

2. Wood Structural Panel Grading Agency: Certified by EWA - The Engineered

Wood Association.

3. Wood Structural Panels: DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2.

B. Surface Burning Characteristics:

1. Fire Retardant Treated Materials: Maximum 25/450 flame spread/smoke

developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

C. Apply label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction to identify each fire

retardant treated material.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Lumber Grading Rules: SPIB.

B. Miscellaneous Framing: No. 2 grade or better; 19 percent maximum moisture content

after treatment.

C. Wood Structural Panel Floor Sheathing: APA rated plywood

D. Telephone and Electrical Panel Boards: APA plywood

E. Plywood Underlayment: APA underlayment. Facing: sanded.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors:

1. Fasteners: Hot dipped galvanized steel for high humidity and treated wood

locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.

2. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. Expansion shield

and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. Bolt or ballistic

fastener for anchorages to steel.

2.3 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT

A. Fire Retardant Treatment: Chemically treated and pressure impregnated, having flame

spread of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 and showing no

evidence of significant progressive combustion when test is continued for an additional

20 minute period; Interior Type UCFA and Exterior Type UCFB, as applicable.

B. Moisture Content After Treatment: Kiln dried (KDAT).

1. Lumber: Maximum 19 percent.


Rough Carpentry

06 10 00-3

2. Structural Panels: Maximum 15 percent.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions

before starting work.

B. Verify substrate conditions are ready to receive blocking, curbing and framing.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate placement of blocking, curbing and framing items.

B. Coordinate requirements and locations of concealed wood blocking for support of toilet

and bath accessories, wall cabinets, wood trim, handrails and similar items.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Existing Stage Platform Framing:

1. Provide continuous blocking at the edges perpendicular to joist framing.

B. New Stage Platform Framing:

1. Select individual pieces such that knots and defects will not interfere with

placement of bolts when nailing or making connections.

2. Discard defective pieces.

3. Set structural members level, plumb and in correct position.

4. Make provisions for erection loads and for sufficient temporary bracing to

maintain that structure is safe, plumb and in alignment until completion of

erection and installation of permanent bracing.

5. Construct load bearing framing members in full length without splices.

6. Provide continuous blocking at the edges perpendicular to joist framing.

C. Stage Platform Sheathing & Underlayment:

1. Subfloor Sheathing (Decking): Minimum 5/8 inch thick plywood; fastened with

adhesive and annular ring grooved nails or screws, 1-1/4 inch into joists with

longer edge perpendicular to floor framing, with end joints staggered and sheet

ends over bearing. Attach with subfloor glue and drywall screws at 3 inch

intervals at perimeters and 6 inch intervals over joists.

2. Place building paper between floor underlayment and subflooring.

3. Underlayment: Minimum 1/2 inch thick underlayment grade plywood. Install

after dust- and dirt-generating activities have ceased and prior to application of

finished flooring.

a. Install the underlayment over subfloor deck with cross-joints staggered at

least 16" O.C. Fasten using angular or screw nails that will penetrate 1-

1/4" into the subfloor. These fastener are to be spaced at 24" through the

board and spaced 18" apart along the edges. Nail center of board working


Rough Carpentry

06 10 00-4

out toward the edges to eliminate any irregularity. Do not fit the

underlayment too snugly; leave space between the boards equal to the

thickness of a dime to allow for expansion. Fasteners are to be driven

flush with the surface or set no more than 1/16" below. Lightly sand any

surface roughness, particularly at joints and around nails.

D. Flitch Beam: Fabricate flitch beam for support of sliding door track of custom cabinet

work; securely anchor multiple members together with through staggered attachments at

maximum 16” o.c. along both upper and lower quarter of beam depth, and max. 3” from

ends.

E. Set members level and plumb, in correct position.

F. Place horizontal members, crown side up.

G. Space framing and furring 16 inches o.c. minimum, unless otherwise noted.

H. Install telephone and electrical panel back boards with wood structural panel sheathing

material where required. Size back boards 12 inches beyond size of electrical panel.

3.4 SCHEDULES

A. Wood blocking, framing and plywood: Fire retardant treated for all applications.

END OF SECTION


Finish Carpentry 06200-1

SECTION 06 20 00

FINISH CARPENTRY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes finish carpentry items; standing and running trim, wall caps, miscellaneous shelving; and hardware and attachment accessories.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry. 2. Section 06 41 00 - Architectural Woodwork 3. Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors. 4. Section 09 90 00 - Paints and Coatings: Painting and finishing of finish carpentry items.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. APA-The Engineered Wood Association: 1. APA/EWA PS 1 - Voluntary Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood.

B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware. 2. ASTM B695 - Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron

and Steel 3. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials. 4. ASTM F1667 - Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples.

C. Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association: 1. HPVA HP-1 - American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.

D. U.S. Department of Commerce National Institute of Standards and Technology: 1. DOC PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate work with plumbing rough-in, electrical rough-in, installation of associated and adjacent components.

B. Coordinate locations and requirements for blocking and backing for support and attachment of work of this section.


A. Perform work in accordance with AWI AWS Section 6, Custom Grade.



B. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum 200/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.


A. Protect work from moisture damage.

B. Maintain storage space relative humidity within ranges indicated in AWI AWS Section 2.


A. During and after installation of Work of this section, maintain same temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces as will occur after occupancy. 1. Maintain relative humidity within ranges indicated in AWI AWS Section 2.


A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate work with installation of associated and adjacent components.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPONENTS

A. Hardwood Lumber: AWI, Economy Grade; maximum moisture content of 5-10 percent; and the following: 1. Opaque Finished Trim: Popular or Ash Species. 2. Cut or Slicing of Wood: Suppliers option.

B. Hardwood Plywood: AWI Grade AA veneer; with veneer core; type of glue recommended for application; and the following: 1. Species of Veneer: Birch. 2. Cut or Slicing of Veneer: Plain.

C. Softwood Lumber: AWI Grade II; maximum moisture content of 5-10 percent; and the following: 1. Species of Wood: Southern yellow pine.

D. Softwood Plywood: AWI Grade A veneer; with veneer core; type of glue recommended for application; and the following: 1. Species of Veneer: Southern yellow pine.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Wall Adhesive: Cartridge type, compatible with wall substrate, capable of achieving durable bond.



B. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Fasteners: ASTM A153/A153M, hot dipped galvanized steel for high humidity and treated

wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2. Nails and Staples: ASTM F1667.

C. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.

D. Lumber for Shimming and Blocking: Softwood lumber.

E. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer type.

F. Wood Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish color.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.

B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work.

3.2 EXISTING WORK

A. Modify and extend existing finish carpentry installations using materials and methods as required.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install work in accordance with AWI AWS Section 6, Economy Grade.

B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.

C. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.

D. Preparation For Site Finishing: 1. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work

smooth. 2. Site Finishing: Refer to Section 09 90 00.



B. Conform to AWI AWS Section 8 requirements for smoothness, gaps, flushness, flatness and alignment.

END OF SECTION


Architectural Wood Casework 06 41 00-1

SECTION 06 41 00

ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Custom casework.

a. Plastic laminate finished casework. b. Transparent-finished casework.

2. Counter tops. a. Solid surface finished counter tops.

3. Cabinet hardware. 4. Preparation for installing utilities in cabinets. 5. Pre-finish the Work of this Section to the greatest extent possible.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Protection: Perimeter sealant to adjacent construction. 2. Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors: Doors at Opening 101D. 3. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware: Hardware for Doors at Opening 101D. 4. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Sliding Glass Window.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard. 2. ANSI A156.9 - Cabinet Hardware. 3. ANSI A208.1 - Mat-Formed Wood Particleboard.

B. APA-The Engineered Wood Association: 1. APA/EWA PS 1 - Voluntary Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood.

C. Architectural Woodwork Institute: 1. AWI AWS - Architectural Woodwork Standards.

D. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware. 2. ASTM B695 - Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron

and Steel 3. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials. 4. ASTM F1667 - Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples.



1.3 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate work with plumbing rough-in, electrical rough-in, installation of associated and adjacent components.

C. Coordinate locations and requirements for blocking and backing for support and attachment of work of the section.

D. Coordinate transparent finish of wood casework with finish of wood doors for Opening 101D.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: 1. Submit data on specified laminates, solid surface materials, component products, hardware

and accessories.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes.

D. Samples: 1. Submit two, 6 x 6 inch size samples, illustrating cabinet finish. 2. Submit two, 6 x 6 inch size samples, illustrating counter top finish. 3. Submit one sample of hinges and exposed hardware illustrating hardware finish.


A. Perform work in accordance with AWI (Architectural Woodwork Institute) Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Custom Grade.



A. Protect units from moisture damage.

B. Maintain storage space relative humidity within ranges indicated in AWI AWS Section 2.


A. During and after installation of Work of this section, maintain same temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces as will occur after occupancy. 1. Maintain relative humidity within ranges indicated in AWI AWS Section 2.




A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. Indicate field measurements on shop drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 TRANSPARENT-FINISHED WOOD CASEWORK

A. Transparent-Finished Custom Casework: 1. Frameless Construction. 2. Style: Flush Overlay. 3. AWS Section 10. 4. Custom grade. 5. Exterior and Interior Exposed Surfaces: Hardwood lumber and plywood. 6. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Hardwood lumber and plywood. 7. Door and Drawer matching: Sequenced.

B. Casework Construction Details: 1. Drawer Side Joinery: Multiple dovetailed. 2. Edge Profile: Square with matching 1/4 inch thick solid wood edge band. 3. Toe Base Finish: As indicated on Finish Schedule. 4. Grain Direction: Horizontal.

2.2 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CASEWORK

A. Plastic-Laminate-Finished Custom Casework: 1. Frameless construction. 2. Style: Flush overlay. 3. AWS Section 10. 4. Custom grade. 5. Exterior and Interior Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate over

particleboard. 6. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate over particleboard.

B. Casework Construction Details: 1. Drawer Side Joinery: Multiple dovetailed. 2. Edge Profile: Square with matching thick, applied high-pressure decorative laminate band. 3. Toe Base Finish: As indicated on Finish Schedule.

2.3 COUNTER TOPS

A. Synthetic Surface-Finished Counter Tops: AWS Section 11; custom grade. 1. Edge: Square with eased corners. 2. Splash Top Profile: Square with eased corners. 3. Deck at Splash Joint Type: Horizontal butt. 4. Splash Assembly: Field assembled.



2.4 MATERIALS

A. Hardwood Lumber: AWI Grade I; maximum moisture content of 5-10 percent.

B. Hardwood Lumber (Transparent-Finished Trim): AWI Grade I; and the following: 1. Species of Wood: Select Northern Hard Maple 2. Cut or Slicing of Wood: Plain.

C. Hardwood Plywood (Transparent-Finish): HPVA A HP-1; with particleboard core; type of glue recommended for application; and the following: 1. Species of Veneer: Select Northern hard Maple 2. Cut or Slicing of Veneer: Plain. 3. Matching of Individual Leaves to Each Other: Book matching.

D. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1 Grade M2 or better; composed of wood chips or sawdust, medium density, made with water resistant adhesive; melamine finish on interior cabinet work surfaces. 1. Interior Composite Products: Contain no added urea-formaldehyde resins.

E. High Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, GP50 for horizontal surfaces, GP28 for vertical surfaces, BK20 for undecorated backing sheets; color, pattern, and surface texture as selected.

F. Synthetic Surfacing: Synthetic marble of polyester proprietary resins, with integral color and design, stain resistant to domestic chemicals and cleaners. 1. Acceptable Product: Corian, Price Group E, or approved equivalent; colors as selected by

Architect. 2. Coordinate recess in synthetic surfacing for installation of bottom track for sliding glass

window.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesive for High Pressure Decorative Laminates: Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application.

B. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Fasteners: Hot dipped galvanized steel for high humidity and treated wood locations,

unfinished steel elsewhere. 2. Nails and Staples: ASTM F1667.

C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application.

D. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.

E. Grommets: Plastic material for cut-outs.

F. Shelf Standards and Rests: Formed steel channels and rests, cut for fitted rests spaced at 1 inch centers; satin chrome finish.

G. Shelf Brackets: Formed steel brackets, formed for attachment with lugs; satin chrome finish.



H. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped pull, satin chrome finish, 4 inch centers.

I. Magnetic Cabinet Touch Latch

J. Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, two keys for each lock, master keyed, satin chrome finish.

K. Catches: Magnetic.

L. Drawer Slides: Galvanized steel construction, ball bearings separating tracks, full extension type.

M. Hinges: Knuckle disappearing type, satin chrome finish.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Shop-assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings.

B. Fit exposed edges with matching veneer edging. Use one piece for full length only.

C. Cap exposed high pressure decorative laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern.

D. Door and Drawer Fronts: 3/4 inch thick; flush overlay on face frame style.

E. When necessary to cut and fit on site, fabricate materials with ample allowance for cutting. Furnish trim for scribing and site cutting.

F. Apply high pressure decorative laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs.

G. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic and wood laminate finished surfaces.

H. Apply wood laminate by grain matching adjacent sheets to book matching.

I. Mechanically fasten back splash to counter tops with steel brackets at 16 inches on center.

J. Fabricate cabinets and counter tops with cutouts for fixtures and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Prime paint cut edges.

K. Fabricate interior finish carpentry to AWS 6 Custom Grade.

L. Fabricate casework in accordance with AWS Section 10 Custom Grade.

M. Fabricate counter tops in accordance with AWS Section 11 Custom Grade.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.

C. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install casework in accordance with AWI AWS - Custom Grade.

B. Set and secure casework in place; rigid, plumb, and level.

C. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components.

D. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units and counter tops.

E. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose.

F. Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages.

G. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces.

3.3 TOLERANCES


B. Conform to AWI AWS Section 10 requirements for the following: 1. Smoothness. 2. Gaps. 3. Flushness. 4. Flatness. 5. Alignment

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements

B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.

C. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.

END OF SECTION


Acoustical Spray Finish 07 21 29-1

SECTION 07 21 29

ACOUSTICAL SPRAY FINISH

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes sprayed cellulose fiber, acoustical insulation as indicated on the Drawings and herein specified.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials. 2. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical

Tube Furnace at 750 Degrees C. 3. ASTM E736 - Report of Field Test for Bond Strength. 4. ASTM E1042 – Sprayed Insulation Requirements.

B. Green Seal: 1. GS-11 - Product Specific Environmental Requirements. 2. GS-36 - Aerosol Adhesives.

C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to applicable code for non-combustibility and flame and smoke rating requirements.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: submittal procedures.

B. Submit product data on materials and accessories, describing insulation acoustical and thermal properties.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.

D. Manufacturer’s written certification that the products meet or exceed specified requirements.



E. Manufacturer’s written certification that products contain no asbestos, fiberglass or other man made mineral fibers.

a. Certified wood products.


A. Exposed Locations Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum 25/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience and must be ISO 9001:2008 Certified.

C. Manufacturer must subscribe to independent laboratory follow-up inspection services of Underwriters Laboratories and Factory Mutual. Each bag shall be labeled accordingly.

D. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section, trained and licensed by the manufacturer, with minimum three years documented experience with similar applications.

1.7 MOCKUP

A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for mockup.

B. A representative surface mock-up of not less than 100 square feet for each type of material shall be sprayed and approved by Architect and/or Owner’s representative prior to proceeding.



B. Do not install when ambient and surface temperatures are lower than the manufacturer’s written recommendations.

C. Maintain acceptable ambient and substrate surface temperatures prior to, during, and after installation of materials.

1.9 SCHEDULING


B. Apply materials after hangers and supporting clips are installed, but before subsequent construction of ducts, piping, conduit and other suspended equipment is erected.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPONENTS

A. Acoustical Spray Finish (ASF-1): Spray applied cellulose, thermal and acoustical insulation that has integral color that requires no additional finish materials. Product shall have characteristics as follows: 1. R-Value shall be 3.75 per inch per ASTM C 518. 2. Bond strength shall be greater than 100 psf per ASTM E 736. 3. Product shall be Class 1 Class A per ASTM E 84/ UL 723. 4. Non-corrosive per ASTM C 739. 5. Bond Deflection per ASTM E 759: 6” Deflection in 10’ Span – No Spalling or

Delamination. 6. Contains no added urea-formaldehyde resins. 7. Colors: Available in white, light gray, gray and black.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: As required by spray finish manufacturer for various substrates. 1. Interior Flat and Non-Flat Paints: Maximum volatile organic compound content

in accordance with GS-11.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify surfaces are clean, dry, and free of matter capable of inhibiting adhesion. Report all unsatisfactory conditions in writing to the General Contractor and do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

C. Verify other Work on and within spaces to be insulated is complete prior to application.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Mask and protect adjacent surfaces from overspray or damage.

B. Inspect surfaces to receive acoustical spray finishes prior to application to determine if priming/sealing is required to insure bonding and/or to prevent discoloration caused by migratory stains. Apply primer accordingly, or when recommended by spray finish manufacturer.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Apply acoustical spray finishes to a uniform monolithic density without voids, in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s written application instructions.



B. Apply acoustical spray finishes at various locations to the minimum, cured thicknesses indicated in Schedule below, as determined per ASTM E-605 field test procedure.

C. Install spray applied insulation to achieve an overall noise reduction coefficient (NRC) of 1.05.

D. Tamp wet surface to improve adhesion and to achieve smooth surface.

E. Provide natural or mechanical ventilation continuously to properly cure the spray finishes.

F. Remove and dispose of over-spray.

3.4 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Protecting installed construction.

B. Do not permit subsequent construction work to disturb applied spray finishes.

3.5 SCHEDULE

A. Open ceiling areas above suspended, cloud style acoustical grid ceilings: 1. Thickness: 1” min. 2. Color: As selected from manufacturer’s full color range.

END OF SECTION


Firestopping

07 84 00-1

SECTION 07 84 00

FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Firestopping through-penetrations of fire rated assemblies. 2. Firestopping joints in fire rated assemblies. 3. Firestopping tops of fire rated walls. 4. Smoke sealing penetrations and joints of smoke partitions.

B. Related Divisions: 1. Plumbing: Plumbing work requiring firestopping. 2. HVAC: Mechanical work requiring firestopping. 3. Electrical: Electrical work requiring firestopping.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials. 2. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction

and Materials. 3. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire

Stops. 4. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems

B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 3. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems. 4. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.

C. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed): 1. WH - Certification Listings.

D. South Coast Air Quality Management District: 1. SCAQMD Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Firestopping (Through-Penetration Protection System): Sealing or stuffing material or assembly placed in spaces between and penetrations through building materials to arrest movement of fire, smoke, heat, and hot gases through fire rated construction.


Firestopping

07 84 00-2

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Firestopping Materials: ASTM E119, ASTM E814, UL 263, or UL 1479, to achieve fire ratings of adjacent construction in accordance with applicable UL Design Numbers.

B. Surface Burning: ASTM E84 with maximum flame spread / smoke developed rating of 25/450.

C. Firestop interruptions to fire rated assemblies, materials, and components.


A. Conform to applicable building and fire codes for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics.

1.6 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria.

C. Schedule: Submit schedule of opening locations and sizes, penetrating items, and required listed design numbers to seal openings to maintain fire resistance rating of adjacent assembly.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit preparation and installation instructions.

E. Engineering Judgements: For conditions not covered by UL or WH listed designs, submit judgements by licensed professional engineer suitable for presentation to authority having jurisdiction for acceptance as meeting code fire protection requirements.



B. Do not apply materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F.

C. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum 3 days after installation of materials.

D. Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials.


Firestopping

07 84 00-3

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRESTOPPING

A. Product Description: Different types of products by multiple manufacturers are acceptable as required to meet performance requirements; provide only one type for each similar application. 1. Silicone Firestopping Elastomeric Firestopping: Single component silicone

elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant. 2. Foam Firestopping Compounds: Single component foam compound. 3. Formulated Firestopping Compound of Incombustible Fibers: Formulated

compound mixed with incombustible non-asbestos fibers. 4. Fiber Stuffing and Sealant Firestopping: Composite of mineral fiber stuffing

insulation with silicone elastomer for smoke stopping. 5. Mechanical Firestopping Device with Fillers: Mechanical device with

incombustible fillers and silicone elastomer, covered with sheet stainless steel jacket, joined with collars, penetration sealed with flanged stops.

6. Intumescent Firestopping: Intumescent putty compound which expands on exposure to surface heat gain.

7. Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows.

B. Color: As selected from manufacturer’s full range of colors.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces and suitable for required fire ratings.

B. Installation Accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and other devices required to position and retain materials in place.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify openings are ready to receive firestopping.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting bond of firestopping material.

B. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond.

C. Install backing and/or damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage.


Firestopping

07 84 00-4

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves, piping, ductwork, conduit and other items, requiring firestopping.

B. Apply primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of firestopping material and substrate involved, and as required for compliance with required fire ratings.

C. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve required fire and smoke rating.

D. Compress fibered material to maximum 40 percent of its uncompressed size.

E. Place foamed material in layers to ensure homogenous density, filling cavities and spaces. Place sealant to completely seal junctions with adjacent dissimilar materials.

F. Place intumescent coating in sufficient coats to achieve rating required.

G. Remove dam material after firestopping material has cured. Dam material to remain.


A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Testing and Inspection Services.

B. Inspect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule.

3.5 CLEANING


B. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.



B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.

END OF SECTION


Joint Protection

07 90 00-1

SECTION 07 90 00

JOINT PROTECTION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes sealants and joint backing, precompressed foam sealers, hollow gaskets, and accessories.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Firestopping sealants. 2. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C834 - Latex Sealing Compounds. 2. ASTM C919 - Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. 3. ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 4. ASTM C1193 - Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. 5. ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber. 6. ASTM D1667 - Flexible Cellular Materials--Vinyl Chloride Polymers and

Copolymers (Closed-Cell Foam). 7. ASTM D2628 - Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric Joint Seals for Concrete

Pavements.

B. South Coast Air Quality Management District: 1. SCAQMD Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Products Data: Submit data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, substrate preparation, limitations, and color availability.

C. Samples: Submit two actual samples, illustrating sealant colors for selection.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures, surface preparation, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.

E. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories failing to achieve airtight seal, watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, and sealants which do not cure.


Joint Protection

07 90 00-2

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with documented experience.

B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with documented experience, and approved by manufacturer.


A. Section 01 60 00 - Products Requirements.

B. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by sealant manufacturer during and after installation.

1.6 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate Work with sections referencing this section.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT SEALERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning Corporation. 2. GE Silicones. 3. Pecora Corporation. 4. Sika Corporation.

B. Products Description: 1. Sealant Type S-1: High Performance General Purpose Exterior (Nontraffic)

Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, G, and A; multi-component. a. Color: Colors as selected. b. Applications: Use for:

1) Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry, stone and limestone.

2) Joints between concrete and other materials. 3) Joints between metal frames and other materials. 4) Sealing lap joints in metal flashings. 5) Other exterior nontraffic joints for which no other sealant is

indicated. 2. Sealant Type S-2: Not Used. 3. Sealant Type S-3: General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex;

ASTM C834, single component, paintable. a. Applications: Use for interior wall and ceiling control joints, joints

between door and window frames and wall surfaces, and other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated.


Joint Protection

07 90 00-3

b. Interior Sealants and Sealant Primers: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule 1168.

4. Sealant Type S-4: Plumbing Fixture/Tile Sealant: White silicone; ASTM C920, Uses M and A; single component, mildew resistant. a. Applications: Use for joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and

wall surfaces, and joints between toilet room counter tops and wall surfaces.

b. Interior Sealants and Sealant Primers: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule 1168.

5. Sealant Type S-5: Butyl Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Use NT; single component, solvent release, non-skinning, non-sagging. a. Color: Color as selected. b. Applications: Use for concealed sealant beads in sheet metal work and

under exterior door thresholds. c. Interior Sealants and Sealant Primers: Maximum volatile organic

compound content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule 1168.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.

C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D1056, sponge or expanded rubber oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.

D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work.

C. Verify joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter impairing adhesion of sealant.

B. Clean and prime joints.

C. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C1193.

D. Protect elements surrounding Work of this section from damage or disfiguration.


Joint Protection

07 90 00-4

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.

B. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919.

C. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific dimensions are indicated.

D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.

E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.

F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

G. Tool joints concave.

H. Compression Gaskets: Avoid joints except at ends, corners, and intersections; seal joints with adhesive; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface.

3.4 CLEANING


B. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.



B. Protect sealants until cured.

END OF SECTION


Standard Steel Frames

08 12 14-1

SECTION 08 12 14

STANDARD STEEL FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes new fire rated and non-rated steel frames, corner trim members, and minor repairs to existing hollow metal frames.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry Assemblies: Masonry grout fill of metal frames

and placement of anchors into masonry wall construction. 2. Section 08 13 14 - Standard Steel Doors. 3. Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors. 4. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware. 5. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI A250.8 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and

Frames.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

C. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors, Fire Windows. 2. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 2. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 3. UL 1784 - Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate frame elevations, reinforcement, anchor types and spacing, location of cut-outs for hardware, and finish.

C. Product Data: Submit frame configuration and finishes.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special installation instructions.



08 12 14-2

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Conform to requirements of ANSI A250.8.

B. Fire Rated Frame Construction: Conform to one of the following: 1. NFPA 252; with neutral pressure level at 40 inches maximum above sill at 5

minutes into test. 2. UL 10C. 3. 20-Minute Fire Rated Corridor Frames: Fire tested without hose stream test.

C. Installed Fire Rated Frame Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class same as fire door.

D. Attach label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction to identify each fire rated door frame.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.



B. Accept frames on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.

C. Break seal on-site to permit ventilation.

1.7 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate Work with frame opening construction, door, and hardware installation.

C. Sequence installation to accommodate required door hardware electric wire connections.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Amweld Building Products, Inc. 2. Ceco Door Products. 3. Republic Builders Products. 4. Steelcraft.



08 12 14-3

B. Product Description: Standard shop fabricated steel frames, fire rated and non-rated types. 1. Exterior Frames:

a. Level 3 for Door Model 1, nominal 16 gage/0.053 inch thick material, base metal thickness.

2. Interior Frames: a. Level 2 for Door Model 1, nominal 16 gage/0.053 inch thick material,

base metal thickness.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Hollow metal jamb and head corner trim members & adhesive.

B. Removable Stops: Rolled steel channel shape, butted corners; prepared for countersink style screws.

C. Bituminous Coating: Non-asbestos fibered asphalt emulsion.

D. Primer: ANSI A250.10 rust inhibitive type.

E. Silencers: Specified in Section 08 71 00.

F. Weatherstripping: Specified in Section 08 71 00.

G. Hollow Metal Frame Repair Filler: 1. Two-part polyester resin metal body filler. 2. Product Quality Standard: 3M Bondo 262, or approved equivalent.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate frames as welded unit.

B. Transom Bars for Glazed Lights or Louvers: Fixed type, of same profiles as jamb and head, unless indicated otherwise on drawings.

C. Fabricate frames with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place. Provide mortar guard boxes.

D. Reinforce frames wider than 48 inches with roll formed steel channels fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top.

E. Prepare frames for silencers. Provide three single silencers for single doors and mullions of double doors on strike side. Provide two single silencers on frame head at double doors without mullions.

F. Attach fire rated label to each fire rated frame.

G. Fabricate frames to suit masonry wall coursing with 4 inch head member, or as indicated on Drawings.



08 12 14-4

2.4 SHOP FINISHING

A. Steel Sheet: Galvanized to ASTM A653/A653M A60.

B. Primer: Baked.

C. Frames in Masonry: Coat inside of frame profile with bituminous coating to minimum thickness of 1/16 inch.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.

C. Inspect existing HM frames to remain for visible damage.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install frames in accordance with ANSI A250.8.

B. Coordinate with masonry, gypsum board and other wall constructions for anchor placement.

C. Install with adhesive corner trim angles at masonry opening jambs and head corners as indicated on drawings.

D. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing specified in Section 08 80 00.

E. Coordinate installation of frames with installation of hardware specified in Section 08 71 00 and doors in Section 08 13 14 and 08 14 16.

F. Install roll formed steel reinforcement channels between two abutting frames. Anchor to structure and floor.

3.3 MISCELLANEOUS REPAIRS

A. Noticeably dented or damages existing HM frames: 1. Grind, sand otherwise prepare damaged areas of previously painted HM frames

for application of filler compound. 2. Apply filler to smooth out defects per manufacturer’s recommendations. 3. Sand smooth after curing.





08 12 14-5

B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/8 inch measured with straight edges, crossed corner to corner.

3.5 SCHEDULE

A. Interior Frames: Primed finish, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Exterior Frames: Galvanized with primed finish.

END OF SECTION


Standard Steel Doors

08 13 14-1

SECTION 08 13 14

STANDARD STEEL DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes non-rated and thermally insulated steel doors and panels and door louvers.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08 12 14 - Standard Steel Frames. 2. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware. 3. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass for doors. 4. Section 09 90 00 - Paints and Coatings: Field painting of doors.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI A250.8 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and

Frames.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. ASTM C1363 - Standard Test Method for the Thermal Performance of Building

Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus. 3. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials.

C. Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association: 1. HMMA 810 - Hollow Metal Doors.

D. Steel Door Institute: 1. SDI 108 - Recommended Selection and Usage Guide for Standard Steel Doors.

E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 1784 - Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate door elevations, internal reinforcement, closure method, and cut-outs for glazing, louvers, and finishes.



08 13 14-2

C. Product Data: Submit door configuration, location of cut-outs for hardware reinforcement.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special installation instructions.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Perform Work in accordance with ANSI A250.8.

B. Surface Burning Characteristics: 1. Foam Insulation: Maximum 75/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when

tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

C. Apply label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction to identify each foam plastic insulation board.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.


A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.

B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.

C. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination.

B. Coordinate Work with door opening construction, door frame, and door hardware installation.

C. Coordinate Work with existing door frames scheduled to remain. Field verify and adjust machining of new doors to member with existing receiver strike and hinges.

D. Coordinate installation to accommodate door hardware electric wire connections.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD STEEL DOORS

A. Manufacturers:



08 13 14-3

1. Amweld Building Products, Inc. 2. Ceco Door Products. 3. Republic Builders Products. 4. Steelcraft.

B. Product Description: 1. Exterior Doors (Non-Rated / Insulated): ANSI A250.8, 1-3/4 inch thick.

a. Level 3 – Extra Heavy Duty, Model 1, full flush design. 2. Interior Doors (Non-Rated): ANSI A250.8, 1-3/4 inch thick.

a. Level 2 - Heavy Duty, Model 1, full flush design.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Face: Steel sheet in accordance with ANSI A250.

B. End Closure: Channel, 0.04 inches thick, flush.

C. Core: Cardboard honeycomb.

D. Thermal Insulated Door: Total insulation R-Value of 7, measured in accordance with ASTM C236.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Louvers: 1. Material and Finish: Roll formed steel; prime painted. 2. Louver Blade: Inverted Y blade, sight proof. 3. Louver Free Area: As indicated. 4. Frame: Screw attached to louver core with concealed fasteners.

B. Removable Stops: Rolled steel, channel shape, mitered corners; prepared for countersink style screws.

C. Astragals for Double Doors: Steel, T shaped, specifically for double doors.

D. Primer: ANSI A250.10 rust inhibitive type.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate doors with hardware reinforcement welded in place.

B. Attach astragal to one leaf of pairs of doors.

2.5 SHOP FINISHING

A. Steel Sheet: Galvanized to ASTM A653/A653M A60.

B. Primer: Baked.



08 13 14-4

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors in accordance with ANSI A250.8.

B. Install door louvers, plumb and level.

C. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in Section 08 13 14 and hardware specified in Section 08 71 00.

D. Coordinate installation of doors with existing frames scheduled to remain. Field verify and adjust machining of new doors to member with existing receiver strike and hinges.

E. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing specified in Section 08 80 00.

F. Touch-up damaged shop finishes.



B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for adjusting.

B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement.

3.5 SCHEDULE

A. Interior Doors: Primed finish, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Exterior Doors: Galvanized with primed finish; insulated.

END OF SECTION


Flush Wood Doors

08 14 16-1

SECTION 08 14 16

FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes flush wood doors; flush and flush glazed configuration with louvers; fire rated and non-rated.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 41 00 - Architectural Wood Casework: Wood doors for 101D at

wood casework. 2. Section 08 12 14 - Standard Steel Frames. 3. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware. 4. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing. 5. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Site finishing of wood doors with

opaque finish.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Architectural Woodwork Institute: 1. AWI AWS - Architectural Woodwork Standards.

B. Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association: 1. HPVA HP-1 - American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative

Plywood.


D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 2. UL - Building Materials Directory.

E. Warnock Hersey: 1. WH - Certification Listings.

1.3 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate Work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation.


Flush Wood Doors

08 14 16-2

C. Coordinate stain and transparent finish of sliding wood doors for Opening 101D with finish of custom casework in Entry Lobby.

D. Coordinate Work with existing door frames scheduled to remain. Field verify and adjust machining of new doors to member with existing receiver strike and hinges.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: 1. Submit data for door core materials and construction. 2. Submit data for veneer species, type and characteristics. 3. Submit data for factory finishes.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts

required, special beveling, special blocking for hardware, and factory machining criteria.

2. Indicate cutouts for glazing and louvers.

D. Samples: 1. Submit two samples of door veneer, 8 x 8 inch in size illustrating wood grain,

stain color, and sheen.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special installation instructions.


A. Perform Work in accordance with AWI AWS Section 9, Premium Grade.

B. Finish doors in accordance with AWI AWS Section 5, Premium Grade.

C. Fire Rated Door and Panel Construction: Conform to one of the following: 1. NFPA 252; with neutral pressure level at 40 inches maximum above sill at 5

minutes into test. 2. UL 10C. 3. 20-Minute Fire Rated Corridor Doors: Fire tested without hose stream test.

D. Fire Rated Door Construction: Rate of rise of 450 degrees F across door thickness for stair doors.

E. Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as scheduled.

F. Attach label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction to identify each fire rated door.


Flush Wood Doors

08 14 16-3

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS




B. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with AWI AWS Section 2.

C. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. 1. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.

B. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.

C. Furnish manufacturer’s “Life of Installation” warranty for interior doors.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Algoma Hardwoods Inc. 2. Eggers Industries. 3. Graham Manufacturing Corp. 4. Marshfield Door Systems.

B. Product Description: Solid core flush wood doors; wood veneer facing material; fire rated and non-rated types; flush glazed design; with louvers where indicated; factory pre-fit; shop finished. 1. Flush Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick; solid core, five-ply construction. 2. Provide core reinforcement as required for oversize, 4-foot wide, sliding doors.

C. Performance / Design Criteria: 1. Performance Duty Level: WDMA I.S. 1A. 2. Fire Resistance: As indicated on Drawings.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Solid Core, Non-Rated: AWI AWS Section 9, Type PC – Particleboard or agrifiber.

B. Solid Core, Fire Rated: AWI AWS Section 9, Type FD 1.


Flush Wood Doors

08 14 16-4

C. Veneer Facing - Transparent Finish: Typical unless otherwise noted, AWI Premium quality wood, plain sliced, Select White Birch with book matched grain. 1. Pair match multiple door leaves in single opening.

D. Veneer Facing - Opaque Finish: Only as noted; close-grain hardwood veneer of fabricator’s choice.

E. Facing Adhesive: Type II - water resistant.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Metal Louvers: Specified in Section 08 13 14 - Standard Steel Doors.

B. Door Glazing: s specified in 08 80 00 - Glazing.

C. Glazing Stops: Wood with metal clips for rated doors, mitered corners; prepared for countersink style screws.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate non-rated doors in accordance with AWI AWS Section 9 requirements.

B. Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards and to UL requirements. Attach fire rating label and temperature rise label to door.

C. Astragals for Double Doors: Steel, T shaped, overlapping and recessed at face edge, specifically for double doors.

D. Furnish lock blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer for hardware reinforcement.

E. Vertical Exposed Edge of Stiles: Of same species as veneer facing.

F. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing.

G. Bond edge banding to cores.

H. Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. Do not machine for surface hardware. Furnish solid blocking for through bolted hardware.

I. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings.

J. Provide edge clearances in accordance with AWI AWS Section 9.

2.5 FINISHING

A. Factory finish doors in accordance with AWI AWS Section 5; Premium Grade.

B. Transparent Finish System: Stained color as selected; satin sheen.


Flush Wood Doors

08 14 16-5

1. System 11: Catalyzed polyurethane. 2. Stain: General doors; color as selected by Architect. 3. Stain: Sliding doors; coordinate color tone with adjacent casework finish.

C. Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample.

D. Seal door top edge with clear sealer to match door facing.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors in accordance with AWI AWS Section 9 and manufacturer's instructions.

B. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware. Comply with hardware manufacturer’s recommendations for installation of sliding wood doors.

C. Coordinate installation of doors with existing frames scheduled to remain. Field verify and adjust machining of new doors to member with existing receiver strike and hinges.

D. Install door louvers plumb and level.

E. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing specified in Section 08 80 00.

F. Site finish doors indicated for opaque finish in accordance with Section 09 90 00.

3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES


B. Conform to AWI AWS Section 9 requirements for the following: 1. Fit and clearance tolerances. 2. Gaps. 3. Flushness. 4. Flatness. 5. Squareness


Flush Wood Doors

08 14 16-6

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement.

C. Adjust closer for full closure.

END OF SECTION


Access Doors And Panels

08 31 13-1

SECTION 08 31 13

ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes fire resistive rated and non-rated access doors and panels with frames. 1. Provide for access to controls, valves, traps, dampers, cleanouts, and similar

items requiring operation behind inaccessible finished surfaces. 2. Coordinate exact locations with various trades to assure proper placement of

access doors and panels. 3. Coordinate exact sizes required for access to concealed equipment.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 90 00 - Paints and Coatings: Field paint finish.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction

and Materials.

B. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed): 1. WH - Certification Listings.


D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 2. UL 263 - Standard for Safety for Fire Tests of Building Construction and

Materials.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate exact position of access door units.

C. Product Data: Submit literature indicating sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, fire resistance listings, and details of adjoining Work.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation requirements and rough-in dimensions.



08 31 13-2


A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of access units.


A. Fire Rated Access Door Construction: Conform to one of the following: 1. Wall Access Doors: NFPA 252 or UL 10B. 2. Ceiling Access Doors: ASTM E119 or UL 263.

B. Installed Fire Rated Access Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as indicated on Drawings.

C. Attach label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction to identify each fire rated access door.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified with minimum three years documented experience.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 01 30 00 - Project Coordination.

B. Coordinate Work with work requiring controls, valves, traps, dampers, cleanouts, and similar items requiring operation being located behind finished surfaces.

C. Coordinate Work with existing masonry opening, as indicated on drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

A. Manufacturers: 1. J. L. Industries. 2. Karp Associates, Inc. 3. Nystrom Products Co. 4. Milcor LTD, Partnership.

B. Flush Framed Access Doors (Type 1): Frames and nominal 1 inch wide exposed flanges of 16 gage steel and door panels of 14 gage steel.

C. Gypsum Board Access Doors (Type 2): Frames and nominal 1 inch wide flanges of 16 gage steel and door panels of 14 gage steel. Design flanges to be concealed by gypsum board joint finishing.



08 31 13-3

D. Fire Rated Access Doors (Type 3): Frames and nominal 1 inch wide exposed flanges of minimum 16 gage steel and door panels of 20 gage steel. Provide self closing and latching doors with keyed lock to match cylinders specified in Section 08 71 00. Attach label to fire rated doors for rating indicated.

E. Gypsum Board Fire Rated Access Doors (Type 4): 16 gage steel frames with minimum 22 gage galvanized steel drywall bead flanges and door panels of 20 gage steel. Design flanges to be concealed by gypsum board joint finishing compound specified in Section 09 21 16. Provide self closing and latching doors with keyed lock to match cylinders specified in Section 08 71 00. Attach label to fire rated doors for rating indicated.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate units of continuous welded construction; weld, fill, and grind joints to assure flush and square unit.

B. Wall and Ceiling Access Door and Panel Hardware: 1. Hinge: Standard continuous or concealed spring pin type, 175 degree steel

hinges. 2. Lock: Self-latching lock. Screw driver slot for quarter turn cam lock.

C. Size Variations: Obtain acceptance of manufacturer’s standard size units, which vary slightly from sizes shown or scheduled.

D. Field verify existing masonry opening for custom -sized application

2.3 SHOP FINISHING

A. Base Metal Protection: Prime coat units with baked on primer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify rough openings for access doors and panels are correctly sized and located.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Secure frames rigidly in place, plumb and level in opening, with plane of door and panel face aligned with adjacent finished surfaces. 1. Set concealed frame type units flush with adjacent finished surfaces.

B. Position unit to provide convenient access to concealed work requiring access.

C. Install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80 and requirements for fire listing.



08 31 13-4

3.3 SCHEDULES

A. Provide access doors where indicated, or if not indicated, as needed for access to concealed work.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of access doors with the Installer of concealed work and obtain Architect's acceptance of final locations.

C. Provide types of access doors in accordance with the following: 1. For Masonry Walls: Type 1. 2. For Gypsum Board Walls and Ceilings: Type 2. 3. For Fire Rated Masonry Walls: Type 3. 4. For Fire Rated Gypsum Board Walls and Ceilings: Type 4.

END OF SECTION


Metal-Framed Storefronts 08410-1

SECTION 08 41 13

ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes aluminum-framed storefront and window framing systems including aluminum and glass doors, aluminum frames, and related weather stripping.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Sealers: Standard for perimeter sealants. 2. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware: Hardware items other than specified in this

section. 3. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Aluminum Association: 1. AA ADM 1 - Aluminum Design Manual.

B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association: 1. AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2 - Specification for Windows, Doors and Unit

Skylights. 2. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum. 3. AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and

Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections. 4. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum from Shop to

Site. 5. AAMA SFM-1 - Aluminum Store Front and Entrance Manual.

C. American Society of Civil Engineers: 1. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

D. American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy

Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 2. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials. 3. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior

Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors By Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 4. ASTM E1105 - Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water

Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference.

E. Green Seal: 1. GC-03 - Anti-Corrosive Paints.

F. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings:



1. SSPC Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I - Inorganic and Type II - Organic). 2. SSPC Paint 25 - Red Iron Oxide, Zinc Oxide, Raw Linseed Oil, and Alkyd

Primer.


A. System Design: Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall, including building corners. 1. As calculated in accordance with applicable code, as measured in accordance

with ASTM E330.

B. Deflection: Limit mullion deflection to 1/175 of span; with full recovery of glazing materials.

C. System Assembly: Accommodate movement within system, movement between system and peripheral construction, dynamic loading and release of loads, and deflection of structural support framing without damage to components or deterioration of seals movement.

D. Air Infiltration: Limit air leakage through assembly to 0.06 cfm/min/sq ft of wall area, measured at reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf as measured in accordance with AAMA 501.

E. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2 with test pressure difference of 20 percent of design pressure, with minimum differential of 2.86 lbf/sq ft and maximum of 12.00 lbf/sq ft.

F. Expansion / Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components and anchorage.

G. System Internal Drainage: Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or migrating moisture occurring within system, to exterior by weep drainage network.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related Work and expansion and contraction joint location and details.

C. Color Charts: Three copies of charts of aluminum finish colors available.

D. Samples: Two samples of each color finish selected by Architect on actual metal to be used.

E. Certification: Written certification that system being provided is designed in accordance with applicable wind force loading and requirements of this specification.




A. Perform Work in accordance with AAMA SFM-1 and AAMA MCWM-1 - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience approved by manufacturer.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION


B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with strippable coating. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond when exposed to sunlight or weather.



B. Do not install sealants nor glazing materials when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F during and 48 hours after installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS

A. Manufacturers: 1. EFCO Corp. 2. Kawneer 3. YKK AP America, Inc.

B. Product Description: 1. Aluminum Framing Systems: Thermally broken, 2" x 4-1/2" nominal frame size,

flush glazing stops, drainage holes; internal weep drainage system; front glazed, screw spline fabrication.

2. Mullions: Profile of extruded aluminum cladding with internal reinforcement of aluminum or shaped steel structural section.

3. Doors: Aluminum framed glass doors; 1-3/4 inches thick for 1” glazing, nominal 6 inch wide top rail and vertical stiles, nominal 12 inch wide bottom rail; beveled glazing stops.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221; 6061 alloy, T5 temper typical.



B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209, 5005 alloy, H15 or H34 temper.

C. Sheet Steel: ASTM A653/A653M; galvanized to minimum G90 (Z275).

D. Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M; shaped to suit mullion sections, galvanized to G60.

E. Glass: Specified in Section 08 80 00.

F. Glazing Materials: Storefront manufacturer’s standard types to suit application and to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements.

G. Hardware: Furnish manufacturer’s standard door hardware for types of doors and applications indicated as specified below. 1. Weather Stripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable.

a. Provide head and jamb weather stripping. b. For double doors, provide adjustable meeting stile weather stripping,

mortised type. 2. Sill Sweep Strips: Retracting resilient seal type, of neoprene compound. 3. Balance of hardware; as specified in Section 08 71 00.

H. Closures, Trim and Flashings: Minimum 0.063 inch thick aluminum; finish to match mullion sections where exposed. 1. Secure with concealed fastening method.

I. Sealant and Backing Materials: 1. Sealant Used Within System (Not Used for Glazing): Manufacturer’s standard

materials to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements. 2. Perimeter Sealant: Same as specified in Section 07 90 00.

J. Fasteners: Stainless steel.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.

B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline in size, and uniform in width.

C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors.

D. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.

E. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware.

F. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads.



2.4 SHOP FINISHING

A. Clear Anodized Aluminum Surfaces: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41 non-specular as fabricated mechanical finish, medium matte chemical finish, and Architectural Class I 0.7 mils clear anodized coating.

B. Concealed Steel Items: Galvanized to ASTM A123/A123M; minimum 2.0 oz/sq ft coating thickness; galvanize after fabrication.

C. Apply bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials.

D. Shop and Touch-Up Primer for Steel Components: SSPC Paint 25 red oxide.

E. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: SSPC Paint 20 zinc rich.

F. Extent of Finish: 1. Apply factory coating to surfaces exposed at completed assemblies. 2. Apply finish to surfaces cut during fabrication so no natural aluminum is visible

in completed assemblies, including joint edges. 3. Apply touch-up materials recommended by coating manufacturer for field

application to cut ends and minor damage to factory applied finish.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other Work.

C. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive Work of this Section.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall system in accordance with AAMA MCWM-1 - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual.

B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities.

C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.

D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances.

E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.



F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent Work to form water tight dam.

G. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier.

H. Install integral flashings and integral joint sealers.

I. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure.

J. Install hardware using templates provided.

K. Coordinate installation of glass with Section 08 80 00; separate glass from metal surfaces.

L. Install perimeter sealants in accordance with performance standards of Section 07 90 00.



B. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft, whichever is less.

C. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting and balancing.

B. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation.

3.5 CLEANING


B. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.

C. Wash down surfaces with solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.

D. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer.



B. Protect finished Work from damage.

END OF SECTION


Door Hardware

08 71 00-1

SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

1. Section includes hardware for wood, steel and aluminum doors.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 01 20 00 - Price and Payment Procedures: Additional, extended width

aluminum cover plates and door thresholds relative to Wood Athletic Floor

Alternate.

2. Section 06 41 00 - Architectural Wood Casework: Cabinet hardware.

3. Section 08 12 14 - Standard Steel Frames.

4. Section 08 13 14 - Standard Steel Doors.

5. Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors.

6. Section 08 31 13 - Access Doors and Frames.

7. Section 08 41 13 - Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts: Weather-

stripping hardware.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute:

1. ANSI A156.1 - Butts and Hinges.

2. ANSI A156.2 - Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches.

3. ANSI A156.3 - Exit Devices.

4. ANSI A156.4 - Door Controls - Closures.

5. ANSI A156.5 - Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products.

6. ANSI A156.6 - Architectural Door Trim.

7. ANSI A156.7 - Template Hinge Dimensions.

8. ANSI A156.8 - Door Controls - Overhead Holders.

9. ANSI A156.12 - Interconnected Locks and Latches.

10. ANSI A156.13 - Mortise Locks and Latches.

11. ANSI A156.15 - Closer Holder Release Devices.

12. ANSI A156.16 - Auxiliary Hardware.

13. ANSI A156.18 - Materials and Finishes

14. ANSI A156.26 – Continuous Hinges.

15. ANSI A156 - Complete Set of 24 BHMA Standards (A156 Series) with Binder.

B. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association:

1. BHMA Directory of Certified Products.

C. National Fire Protection Association:

1. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors, Fire Windows.

2. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:


Door Hardware

08 71 00-2

1. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

2. UL 305 - Panic Hardware.

3. UL - Building Materials Directory.

E. Warnock Hersey:

1. WH - Certification Listings.


A. Fire Rated Openings: Provide door hardware listed by UL or Intertek Testing Services

(Warnock Hersey Listed), or other testing laboratory approved by applicable authorities.

1. Hardware: Tested in accordance with NFPA 252.

B. Comply with applicable accessibility requirements, including the Americans with

Disabilities Act (ADA), 1990: Title II, Subtitle A, the 2010 ADA Standards for

Accessible design, and as follows:

1. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy

to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or

twisting of the wrist.

2. Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements

indicated:

a. Interior Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door.

b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf applied parallel to door at latch.

c. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having

jurisdiction.

3. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high, not more than 3/4 inch high for exterior

sliding doors. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, and finishes.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware, schedules,

catalog cuts, electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

D. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of a Certified

Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware,

as well as procedures and diagrams. Submittal must bear a current Certified Architectural

Hardware Consultant seal. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors,

frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of

door hardware.

1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's

"Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule."

2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets

indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening.


Door Hardware

08 71 00-3

a. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware

Schedule at the end of this Section.

3. Content: Include the following information:

a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware

item.

b. Manufacturer of each item.

c. Fastenings and other pertinent information.

d. Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both

on floor plans and in door and frame schedule.

e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.

f. Mounting locations for door hardware.

g. Door and frame sizes and materials.

h. Description of each electrified door hardware function, including

location, sequence of operation, and interface with other building

monitoring, alarm and control systems.

E. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing Owner's

final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key

set to unique door designations.

F. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of electrified door hardware certifying that

products furnished comply with requirements.

G. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire doors

complies with listed fire door assemblies.

H. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by

manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, indicating current products

comply with requirements.

I. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals

specified in Division 1.

J. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

K. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures, and perimeter

conditions requiring special attention.


A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of installed cylinders and their

master key code.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit data on operating hardware, lubrication

requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance.


Door Hardware

08 71 00-4

D. Keys: Deliver with identifying tags to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware

supplier.


A. Perform Work in accordance with the following requirements:

1. ANSI A156 series.

2. NFPA 80.

3. UL 305.

B. Furnish hardware marked and listed in BHMA Directory of Certified Products.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section

with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Hardware Supplier: Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware with

minimum three years documented experience approved by primary hardware

manufacturers.

C. Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to

assist in work of this section.

1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.

B. Include persons involved with installation of doors, frames and hardware.

C. Keying Conference: Participants of the conference shall be the owner’s representative,

hardware supplier, general contractor and lock manufacturer’s representative. Incorporate

keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware

keying system including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security

required, and plans for future expansion.

2. Preliminary key system schematic diagram.

3. Requirements for key control system.

D. Pre-installation Conference: The hardware supplier representative shall attend the pre-

installation conference as well as a post-installation walk-thru; ensure proper installation

and provide for any adjustments or replacements of hardware as required.




Door Hardware

08 71 00-5

B. Package hardware items individually with necessary fasteners, instructions, and

installation templates, when necessary; label and identify each package with door

opening code to match hardware schedule.

1.10 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate Work with other directly affected sections, including aluminum storefront

entry doors, involving manufacture or fabrication of internal reinforcement for door

hardware and recessed items.

1. Provide templates or actual hardware as required to ensure proper preparation of

doors and frames.

C. Coordinate Work with existing door frames scheduled to remain. Field verify and adjust

to member with existing receiver strike and hinge locations.

D. Sequence installation to accommodate required utility connections.

E. Coordinate Owner's keying requirements during course of Work.

1.11 WARRANTY


B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or

replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within

specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.

2. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware.

3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering.

C. Warranty Period for Finish Hardware: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

D. Warranty Period for Exit Devices: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

E. Warranty Period for Manual Closers: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.

F. Warranty Period for Locksets: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

G. Supply warranty verification to the Owner for products that provide factory warranties

for periods longer than one year.

1.12 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Maintenance materials.


Door Hardware

08 71 00-6

B. Furnish special wrenches and tools applicable for each different and for each special

hardware component.

C. Furnish maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component

manufacturer.


A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Maintenance service.

B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full

maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer.

1. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or

defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper

door hardware operation.

2. Provide parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original

products.

1.14 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Section 01 70 00 – Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

B. Furnish 2-dozen extra screws and other fasteners of each size, type, and finish used with

the hardware items provided. These screws and fasteners are to be delivered to the

hardware installer for use during installation. All extra screws and fasteners and all

special installation tools furnished with the hardware shall be turned over to the Owner at

the completion of the job.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DOOR HARDWARE

A. Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and the

Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3.

1. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size and other distinctive

qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Door Hardware Sets at

end of this Section.

2. Sequence of operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of

operation and interface with other building control systems indicated.

B. Hardware shall be of best grade, entirely free of imperfections in manufacture and finish,

and shall satisfactorily perform various functions needed.

C. Furnish necessary screws, bolts or others fastenings of suitable size and type to anchor

hardware in position and match hardware as to material and finish. Provide Phillips flat-

head screws except as otherwise indicated.


Door Hardware

08 71 00-7

D. Drawings show direction of slide, swing or hand of each door leaf. Furnish each item of

hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as indicated.

E. Items of hardware not definitely specified, but needed for satisfactory installation of

hardware shall be provided. Such items shall be of type and quality suitable for service

needed and comparable to adjacent hardware.

F. Product designations and manufacturers are listed for each door hardware type required

for the purpose of establishing minimum standards of quality and design.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. General Hardware Requirements: Where not specifically indicated, comply with

applicable ANSI A156 standard for type of hardware required. Furnish each type of

hardware with accessories as required for applications indicated and for complete,

finished, operational doors.

1. Templates: Furnish templates or physical hardware items to door and frame

manufacturers sufficiently in advance to avoid delay in Work.

2. Reinforcing Units: Furnished by door and frame manufacturers; coordinated by

hardware supplier or hardware manufacturer.

3. Fasteners: Furnish as recommended by hardware manufacturer and as required to

secure hardware.

a. Finish: Match hardware item being fastened.

4. Fire Ratings: Provide hardware with UL or Warnock Hersey listings for type of

application involved.

B. Hinges: ANSI A156.1, full mortise, ball bearing type and complying with following

general requirements unless otherwise scheduled.

1. Widths: Sufficient to clear trim projection when door swings 180 degrees.

2. Number: Furnish minimum three hinges to 90 inches high, four hinges to 120

inches high for each door leaf.

a. Fire Rated Doors To 86 inches High: Minimum three hinges.

3. Size and Weight: 4-1/2 inch heavy weight ball or oilite bearing typical for 1-3/4

inch doors.

a. Doors Over 40 inches Wide: Extra heavy weight ball or oilite bearing

hinges.

b. Doors 1-3/8 inch Thick: 3-1/2 inch size.

c. Doors 2 inch Thick: 5 inch extra heavy weight ball or oilite bearing.

d. Doors Over 48 inches Wide: 5 inch extra heavy weight ball or oilite

bearing.

4. Pins: Furnish nonferrous hinges with non-removable pins (NRP) at exterior and

locked outswinging doors, non-rising pins at interior doors.

5. Tips: Flat button tips with matching plug.

6. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Bommer.

b. Hager.

c. Ives.

d. McKinney.

e. Stanley.


Door Hardware

08 71 00-8

C. Locksets and Latch Sets: Furnish locksets compatible with specified cylinders.

1. Bored (Cylindrical) Locksets: ANSI A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1 unless

otherwise indicated. Functions as listed in Hardware Sets.

2. Locksets are to have a standard 2 ¾” backset with a full ¾” throw.

3. Lock trim shall be through-bolted to the door to assure correct alignment a proper

operation.

4. Provide manufacturer’s standard wrought box strike for each latchset and lockset

with curved lip extended to protect frame without catching clothing.

5. Furnish and install dust boxes with all strikes.

6. Auxiliary Locksets: ANSI A156.5, Grade 1, mortise dead locks unless otherwise

indicated.

7. Products Quality Standard:

a. Schlage Lock Company “ND Series / Tubular Level TLR”, or approved

equivalent.

D. Dead Locks: Furnish locksets compatible with specified cylinders.

1. Bored Dead Locks: ANSI A156.5, Grade 1, unless otherwise indicated.

Functions as listed in Hardware Sets.

2. Dead locks shall be a full 1” throw, constructed of stainless steel.

3. Provide with occupancy indicator where indicated.

4. Products Quality Standard:

a. Schlage Lock Company “B600 Series”, or approved equivalent.

E. Sliding Door Locks: Furnish lockset compatible with specified cylinders.

1. Premium quality, heavy-duty commercial grade, mortised, keyed door lock

components for bi-parting coplanar sliding wood doors.

2. Provide with trim sets for complete installation.

3. Finish: Satin chrome.

4. Products Quality Standard: FSB North America, keyed entry lock system for

between two bi-parting doors; LSS series with PSS 7007 sliding door lock, or

equivalent, as strike.

5. Similar products of Accurate Lock and Hardware may be considered for

substitution.

F. Sliding Door Hardware:

1. Complete kit of steel, barn door hardware capable of supporting two, bi-parting

wood doors of 400 lbs. weight each.

2. Flat track system comprised track with splice brackets & end stops, track

anchors/spacers, door roller/trolley hangers, floor guides, anti-bump blocks and

other accessories for a complete installation.

3. Product Quality Standard: Standard flat track barn door hardware, style 402 in

brushed steel finish, marketed by Specialty Doors & Hardware, Redondo Beach,

CA (866-815-8151), or approved equivalent.

G. Sliding Door Handles:

1. Product Quality Standard: Rockwood RM 3940 NoirTek, 16” CTC, US32D/630

posts, or approved equivalent.

H. Sliding Door Flushbolts:


Door Hardware

08 71 00-9

1. Manual, mortised top and bottom flush bolts, for only inactive door leaf

containing lock latching strike.

2. Finish to match door lockset.

I. Exit Devices: ANSI A156.3, Grade 1 and conforming to NFPA 80 and NFPA 101.

Functions as listed in Hardware Sets.

1. Types:

a. Exposed vertical rod type suitable for doors requiring exit devices.

b. Rim type suitable for doors requiring exit devices.

2. Furnish standard strikes with extended lips to protect trim from being marred by

latch bolt, with dust-proof floor strikes.

3. All devices mounted on labeled wood doors shall be through-bolt mounted on

door per the exit device manufacturer’s requirements. Coordinate with the wood

door specification.

4. Furnish required filler plates and shim kits for flush mounting of devices on all

doors.

5. Provide stainless steel touch pads. Plastic touch pads are not acceptable.

6. Devices shall have dead latching feature to prevent latchbolt tampering.

7. Lever trim shall be heavy-duty type to limit damage to the unit from vandalism

and fastened by means of concealed welded lugs and through-bolts from inside.

8. Lever trim to match lockset trim in design and finish.

9. Provide cylinder dogging for all exit devices at non-fire rated openings.

10. For narrow stile doors, provide manufacturer’s matching narrow stile-type exit

devices.

11. Acceptable Products:

a. Corbin-Russwin: ED5000 Series

b. Dorma: 5000 Series

c. Sargent: 80 Series

d. Von Duprin: 98/99 Series

J. Closers: ANSI A156.4 modern type with cover, surface mounted closers; full rack and

pinion type with steel spring and non-freezing hydraulic fluid; closers required for fire

rated doors unless otherwise indicated.

1. Shall conform to NFPA 80, NFPA 101 and UL10C.

2. Adjustability: Furnish controls for regulating closing, latching, speeds, and back

checking.

3. Arms: Type to suit individual condition; parallel-arm closers at reverse bevel

doors and where doors swing full 180 degrees.

a. Provide manufacturer’s heaviest duty arm available at doors scheduled

with parallel arm applications.

4. Location: Mount closers on inside of exterior doors and on the non-public side of

interior doors, unless otherwise specified.

5. Full rack-and-pinion type closer with full complement bearings, single piece

forged piston, chrome silicon steel spring, non-critical screw valves; back check,

sweep and latch.

6. ISO 9000 certified. Units stamped with date of manufacturer code.

7. Closers to be non-sized, field adjustable from size 1 to 6.

8. Furnish all non-sized closers with minimum 1 ¼” diameter piston.


Door Hardware

08 71 00-10

9. Use thru-bolts with sex nuts for the closer arm or bodies mounted on wood doors.

10. Plates, brackets and special templates when needed for interface with particular

header door and wall conditions and adjacent hardware.

11. Closers tested to 100 hours of ASTM B117 salt spray test, furnish data on

request.

12. Closers to have a cold weather fluid withstanding temperature range if 120

degrees to –30 degrees hydraulic fluid.

13. Closer products with any type of pressure relief valve system will not be

acceptable.

14. Closer as indicated shall have special rust inhibitor finish which exceeds

ANSI/BHMA standard A156.4 for corrosion resistance by 50 percent.

15. Operating Pressure: Maximum operating pressure as follows.

a. Interior Doors: Maximum 5 pounds.

b. Exterior Doors: Maximum 8.5 pound.

c. Fire Rated Doors: As required for fire rating, maximum 15 pounds.

16. Acceptable Products: LCN 4041XP, or approved equivalent from

Corbin-Russwin, Norton or Sargent.

a. Provide “Spring-Cush” feature on exterior doors and doors without stops.

b. Equip hold-open type closers with T-handle device.

K. Door Controls and Overhead Holders: Furnish with accessories as required for complete

operational installation.

1. Manual Door Holders and Overhead Stops: ANSI A156.8, Grade 1 types as

specified.

2. Acceptable Products (Overhead Stops):

a. Glynn Johnson 450 Series

b. Rixson: 10 Series

c. Sargent 1540 Series

L. Constant Latching Flushbolt Set: ANSI A156.3 Grade 1.

1. Provide combination flushbolt set, using one automatic flushbolt for bottom of

door and one constant, self-latching flushbolt for top of door. When active leaf is

opened, bottom automatic flushbolt is opened. However inactive leaf stays

latched at top until it is manually released. Top bolt engages each time inactive

leaf is closed.

2. Provide dust-proof strikes for bottom flushbolt applications.


a. Automatic Flushbolts:

1) Ives: FB41P (wood doors) / FB31P (hollow metal doors)

2) Rockwood: 1945 (wood doors) / 1845 (hollow metal doors)

3) Hager: 291D (wood doors) / 292D (hollow metal doors)

b. Self-Latching Flushbolts:

1) Ives: FB61P (wood doors) / FB51P (hollow metal doors)

2) Rockwood: 1945 (wood doors) / 1845 (hollow metal doors)

3) Hager: 294D (wood doors) / 293D (hollow metal doors)

M. Push / Pull Plates: ANSI A156.6/ BHMA 1001.


Door Hardware

08 71 00-11

1. Provide concealed mounting where possible. Where exposed fasteners are used,

they shall be countersunk. Furnish pulls with bolts to secure from opposite door

face.

2. Push Plates: Minimum 0.050 inch thick, beveled on four edges. Where applicable

push plates shall be prepared to receive cylinder locks or thumb turns as

scheduled.

a. Size: 3-1/2” x 16”.

b. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1) Hager.

2) Ives.

3) Rockwood.

3. Pull Plates: Minimum 0.050 inch thick, beveled on four edges.

a. Plate Size: 3-1/2” x 16”.

b. Pull Size: 1” diameter, 8” center to center.

c. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1) Hager.

2) Ives.

3) Rockwood.

N. Door Stops: Doorstops shall be furnished for all doors to prevent damage to doors or

hardware from striking adjacent walls or fixtures. Wall bumpers are preferred, but where

not practical, furnish floor stops. Where conditions prohibit the use of either wall or floor

type stops, furnish surface mounted overhead stops.

1. Wall Stops: ANSI A156.1, Grade 1, 2-1/2 inch wall stop with no visible screws.

2. Floor Stops: ANSI A156.1 Grade 1 standard floor type with no visible screws;

furnish with accessories as required for applications indicated.

3. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Ives.

b. Rockwood.

c. Hager.

O. Protection Plates: ANSI A156.6, metal; minimum 0.050 inch thick stainless steel.

Provide for hardware cutouts as needed.

1. Mop Plate: 10 inches in height by 1 inch less than door width, unless otherwise

indicated.

2. Kick Plate: 24 inches in height by 1 inch less than door width, unless otherwise

indicated.

P. Gaskets, Thresholds, and Trim: Furnish as indicated in Schedule, with accessories as

required for complete operational door installations.

1. Weather-stripping: Except as otherwise indicated, provide continuous weather-

stripping at each edge of every exterior door leaf.

a. Provide type, sizes and profiles shown or scheduled.

b. Provide non-corrosive fasteners as recommended by manufacturer for

application indicated.

c. Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily

replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by

manufacturer.


Door Hardware

08 71 00-12

2. Thresholds: Except as otherwise indicated provide standard aluminum threshold

units of type, size and profile as shown or scheduled.

a. Maximum 1/2 inch height.

b. Provide thresholds with vinyl foot seals.

c. Provide thresholds that are 1” wider than depth of frame.

d. Provide thresholds for all transitions at wood flooring locations.

Threshold shall be secured to concrete slab and overlap wood flooring,

allowing for expansion and contraction.


a. Automatic Door Bottom: Zero 367AA or approved equivalent from

Hager or Pemko.

b. Head and Jamb Seals: Zero 188N or approved equivalent from Hager or

Pemko.

c. Adjustable Astragal (Mortised): Zero 56AA/557AA or approved

equivalent from Hager or Pemko.

d. Drip Sweep: Zero 8198A or approved equivalent from Hager or Pemko.

e. Sweep: Zero 154A or approved equivalent from Hager or Pemko.

f. Brush Astragal: Zero 98A or approved equivalent from Hager or Pemko.

Q. Door Silencers: All hollow metal and fiberglass reinforced plastic frames shall have gray

resilient type silencers. Quantity (3) on single doors and quantity (2) on pair of doors.

1. Provide new silencers for all new and existing doors.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Lock Trim: Furnish levers with as selected from manufacturer’s full range of levers and

roses.

1. Do not permit through bolts on solid wood core doors.

B. Through Bolts: Do not permit through bolts and grommet nuts on door faces in occupied

areas unless no alternative is possible.

C. Coordinators: Provide non-handed fully automatic overhead coordinating devices for

sequential closing of paired doors with an astragal.

1. Acceptable Product:

a. Rockwood 1600 Series or approved equivalent from Hager or Ives.

2.4 CYLINDERS AND KEYING

A. Cylinders: ANSI A156.5, Grade 1, 6 pin type with removable cylinders.

1. Provide cylinders for all locksets, exit devices and deadlocks to comply with

ANSI lock functions indicated. Include all cylinders, construction and permanent

cores, inserts and keys.

2. Cylinders must be compatible with existing locksets.

3. Cylinders must allow for multiplex master keying, per Owner’s instructions.


a. Schlage Lock Company, “PRIMUS XP”, or approved equivalent.


Door Hardware

08 71 00-13

B. Additional Cylinders: Provide cylinders for auxiliary doors and equipment as required in

other Sections but not listed in the schedule.

1. Provide new cylinders for all existing doors indicated to remain and key into new

master keying system, per Owner’s instructions.

C. Key Material: Provide manufacturer’s standard embossed keys of nickel silver to ensure

durability. Stamp keys with “DO NOT DUPLICATE”.

D. Manufacturer’s representatives shall meet with the Owner to finalize keying requirements

and obtain keying instructions in writing as outlined.

E. Provide temporary construction keying system during construction period. Permanent

keys will be furnished to the Owner’s Representative prior to occupancy.

F. Permanent cylinders shall be keyed in sets or subsets, master keyed or great grand master

keyed, as directed by Owner. Permanent keys and cylinders shall be marked with the

applicable blind code for identification. These visual key control marks or codes will not

include the actual key cuts. Keys and cylinder identification stamping to be approved by

the Owner. Failure to properly comply with these requirements may be cause to require

replacement of all or any part of the cylinders and keys involved as deemed necessary at

no additional cost to the Owner.

G. Deliver all end user exclusive permanent key blanks and other security keys direct to

Owner’s representative by secure courier, return receipt requested. Failure to properly

comply with these requirements may be cause to require replacement of all or any part of

the cylinders and keys involved as deemed necessary at no additional cost to the Owner.

H. Key Quantity: Furnish keys in the following minimum quantities:

1. Master keys: 10 each.

2. Grandmaster keys: 5 each.

3. Great grandmaster keys: 5 each.

4. Control keys: 5 each.

5. Extra cylinders: 10 each.

6. Change keys per cylinder or keyed alike group: 5 each.

7. Key blanks per cylinder: 2 each.

I. Key Cabinet:

1. Cabinet Construction: Sheet steel construction, piano hinged door with cylinder

type lock master keyed to building system.

2. Cabinet Size: Size for Project keys plus sufficient room to allow for 25 percent

growth.

3. Horizontal strips for key hook labeling with clear plastic strip cover over labels.

4. Finish: Baked enamel, finish, color as selected.

2.5 FINISHING

A. Finishes: ANSI A156.18; furnish following finishes except where otherwise indicated.

1. Typical Door Hardware:


Door Hardware

08 71 00-14

a. BHMA 626, satin chromium plated brass or bronze.

b. BHMA 630, satin finished stainless steel.

2. Closers: Finish appearance to match door hardware on same face of door.

a. BHMA 689, aluminum powder coated or painted.

3. Thresholds: Finish appearance to match door hardware on exterior face of door.

a. BHMA 628, satin aluminum, clear anodized.

4. Other Items: Furnish manufacturer’s standard finishes to match similar hardware

types on same door, and maintain acceptable finish considering anticipated use

and BHMA category of finish.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify doors and frames are ready to receive door hardware and dimensions are as

indicated on shop drawings.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions using

manufacturer’s supplied fasteners. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door

hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way,

coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with

finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items

until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

B. Coordinate mounting heights with door and frame manufacturers. Use templates provided

by hardware item manufacturer.

C. Mounting Heights From Finished Floor to Center Line of Hardware Item: Comply with

manufacturer recommendations and applicable codes where not otherwise indicated.

1. Locksets: 38 inch.

2. Push/Pulls: 42 inch.

3. Dead Locks: 48 inch.

4. Push Pad Type Exit Devices: 42 inch.

5. Cross Bar Type Exit Devices: 38 inch.

6. Top Hinge: Jamb manufacturer’s standard, but not greater than 10 inches from

head of frame to center line of hinge.

7. Bottom Hinge: Jamb manufacturer’s standard, but not greater than 12-1/2 inches

from floor to center line of hinge.

8. Intermediate Hinges: Equally spaced between top and bottom hinges and from

each other.

9. Hinge Mortise on Door Leaf: 1/4 inch. to 5/16 inch from stop side of door.


Door Hardware

08 71 00-15

D. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment

substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.

E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space

fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

F. Key Control System: Place keys on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as

determined by final keying schedule.

G. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior in full bed of sealant complying with requirements

specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Protection."


A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Testing and Inspection Services.

B. Representative of architectural hardware supplier shall inspect installation and certify

hardware and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions and as specified.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door

to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted

to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of

heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility

requirements.

C. Final adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to

acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to

acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in

such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and

finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final

operation of heating and ventilating equipment.

D. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely

from an open position of 30 degrees.

E. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door

will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the

leading edge of the door.

F. Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion,

Installer shall perform the following:

1. Examine and readjust each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function

of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware.


Door Hardware

08 71 00-16

2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel on recommended maintenance

procedures.

3. Replace door hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design,

materials, or installation of door hardware units.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final Cleaning.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.



B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or hardware finish.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes.

3.8 SCHEDULES

A. The following hardware sets are intended to establish type, function and standard of

quality when used together with this section’s requirements. Examine Drawings and

Specifications and furnish proper hardware for door openings.

Hardware Set No. 01

3 EA. HINGES

1 EA. PUSH / PULL PLATES

1 EA. CLOSER

1 EA. DOOR STOP (WHERE REQUIRED)

1 EA. MOP PLATE

3 EA. SILENCERS

Hardware Set No. 02

3 EA. HINGES

1 EA. LOCKSET – ANSI F86 (STOREROOM)

1 EA. CLOSER W/ HOLD OPEN


3 EA. SILENCERS

Hardware Set No. 03


Door Hardware

08 71 00-17

6 EA. HINGES

1 EA. LOCKSET – ANSI F86 (STOREROOM)

2 EA. CLOSERS

1 EA. CONSTANT LATCHING FLUSHBOLT SET

1 EA. DUST PROOF STRIKE

1 EA. COORDINATOR

2 EA. SILENCERS

2 EA. OVERHEAD STOPS

Hardware Set No. 04

3 EA. HINGES

1 EA. LOCKSET – ANSI F84 (CLASSROOM)

1 EA. CLOSER


3 EA. SILENCERS

Hardware Set No. 05

3 EA. HINGES



3 EA. SILENCERS

Hardware Set No. 06

6 EA. HINGES


1 EA. CONSTANT LATCHING FLUSHBOLT SET

1 EA. DUST PROOF STRIKE

1 EA. COORDINATOR

2 EA. OVERHEAD STOPS

2 EA. SILENCERS

Hardware Set No. 07

3 EA. HINGES

1 EA. LOCKSET – ANSI F82 (OFFICE)

1 EA. CLOSER


3 EA. SILENCERS

Hardware Set No. 08

3 EA. HINGES

1 EA. LOCKSET – ANSI F82 (OFFICE)



Door Hardware

08 71 00-18

3 EA. SILENCERS

Hardware Set No. 09

3 EA. HINGES

1 EA. LOCKSET – ANSI F76 (PRIVACY)

1 EA. CLOSER


3 EA. SILENCERS

1 EA. MOP PLATE

Hardware Set No. 10

3 EA. HINGES

1 EA. LOCKSET – ANSI F75 (PASSAGE)

1 EA. CLOSER


3 EA. SILENCERS

Hardware Set No. 11

3 EA. HINGES

1 EA. LOCKSET – ANSI F75 (PASSAGE)


3 EA. SILENCERS

Hardware Set No. 12

3 EA. HINGES

1 EA. RIM EXIT DEVICE – ANSI F01

1 EA. CLOSERS

1 EA. WALL STOPS

3 EA. SILENCERS

Hardware Set No. 13

6 EA. HINGES

2 EA. RIM EXIT DEVICE – ANSI F01

2 EA. CLOSERS

2 EA. WALL STOPS

6 EA. SILENCERS

Hardware Set No. 14

3 EA. HINGES



Door Hardware

08 71 00-19


3

1

EA.

EA.

SILENCERS

THRESHOLD

1 EA. DRIP SWEEP

Hardware Set No. 15

6 EA. HINGES

2 EA. RIM EXIT DEVICE – ANSI F08(CLASSROOM)


1 EA. THRESHOLD

2 EA. DRIP SWEEP

1 SET HEAD AND JAMB SEALS

1 SET BRUSH ASTRAGALS

6 EA. SILENCERS

Hardware Set No. 16

3 EA. HINGES

2 EA. RIM EXIT DEVICE – ANSI F08(CLASSROOM)


1 EA. THRESHOLD

1 EA. DRIP SWEEP

3 EA. SILENCERS

Hardware Set No. 17

2 SETS PIVOTS

2

1

EA.

EA.

INTERMEDIATE PIVOTS

WIDE STYLE EXIT DEVICE - ANSI F08 (CLASSROOM)

2 EA. OFFSET PULLS

1 EA. CLOSERS

1 EA. THRESHOLD

Hardware Set No. 18

1

1

2

2

SET

EA.

EA.

EA.

SLIDING DOOR HARDWARE KIT

SLIDING DOOR LOCKSET

SLIDING DOOR HANDLES

MORTISED LATCHING FLUSH BOLTS

Note: Head, Jamb and Sill Weatherstripping for aluminum/glass entry doors by

aluminum door manufacturer.

END OF SECTION


Glazing 08 80 00 - 1

SECTION 08 80 00

GLAZING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Glass and plastic glazing for metal frames and doors. 2. Glass and metal frame for sliding glass window. 3. Glass glazing materials and installation requirements are included for other sections

referencing this section.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 41 00 - Architectural Wood Casework 2. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Protection: Sealant and back-up material other than glazing

sealants. 3. Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors: Glazed doors. 4. Section 08 41 13 - Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts: Glazing 5. Section 10 28 00 - Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories : Metal framed mirrors.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings Safety.

B. American Society of Civil Engineers: 1. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

C. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C509 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket and

Sealing Material. 2. ASTM C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets,

Setting Blocks, and Spacers. 3. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 4. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass. 5. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. 6. ASTM C1376 - Standard Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on

Flat Glass. 7. ASTM D1929 - Standard Test Method for Determining Ignition Temperature of Plastics. 8. ASTM D4802 - Standard Specification for Poly (Methyl Methacrylate) Acrylic Plastic

Sheet. 9. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials. 10. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound

Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.


Glazing 08 80 00 - 2


12. ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation.

13. ASTM E1886 - Standard Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Missile(s) and Exposed to Cyclic Pressure Differentials.

14. ASTM E1996 - Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes.

D. Consumer Products Safety Commission: 1. CPSC 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing.

E. Glass Association of North America: 1. GANA - Sealant Manual. 2. GANA - Glazing Manual. 3. GANA - Laminated Glass Design Guide.

F. National Fenestration Rating Council Incorporated: 1. NFRC 100 - Procedures for Determining Fenestration Product U-Factors. 2. NFRC 200 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient

and Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence. 3. NFRC 300 - Test Method for Determining the Solar Optical Properties of Glazing

Materials and Systems.

G. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors, Fire Windows. 2. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 3. NFPA 257 - Standard on Fire Test for Window and Glass Block Assemblies.

H. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 2. UL - Building Materials Directory.


A. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to plane of glass as calculated in accordance with applicable code. Thicknesses indicate are minimums to be confirmed by glass supplier/installer. Select minimum thickness in accordance with ASTM E1300.

B. Exterior Glass Deflection: Maximum of 1/175 of glass edge length or 3/4 inch, which ever is less with full recovery of glazing materials.

C. Interior Glass Deflection: Maximum differential deflection for two adjacent unsupported edges when 50 plf force is applied to one panel at any point up to 42 inches above finished floor less than thickness of glass.


Glazing 08 80 00 - 3

D. Thermal and Solar Optical Performance: Measured or calculated in accordance with the following: 1. Maximum U-Values: Comply with ICC IEEC for climate zone in which project is

located. Measure in accordance with NFRC 100. 2. Maximum SHGC: Comply with ICC IEEC for climate zone in which project is located.

Measure in accordance with NFRC 200. 3. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Comply with IBC requirements for engineered glass shop drawings to be signed and sealed by professional engineer. 1. Indicate sizes, layout, thicknesses, and loading conditions for glass.

C. Product Data: 1. Glass and Plastic: Provide structural, physical, and thermal and solar optical performance

characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. 2. Glazing Sealants, Compounds and Accessories: Provide chemical, functional, and

environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors where exposed.

D. Samples: 1. Glass: Submit two samples 12 x 12 inch in size, illustrating each insulating glass unit,

coloration and design. 2. Plastic: Submit two samples 12 x 12 inch in size, illustrating each insulation glass unit,

coloration and design. 3. Glazing Materials: Submit 4 inch long bead of glazing sealant and, color as selected.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify sealed insulated glass, meets or exceeds specified requirements.

F. Installer's Certificate: Certify glass furnished without identification label is installed in accordance with Construction Documents and applicable code.


A. Protect glazing films according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.


A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual, GANA Sealant Manual, and SIGMA for glazing installation method.

B. Light Transmitting Plastics: Class CC1 defined by applicable code when tested in accordance with ASTM D635 in thickness for intended use.


Glazing 08 80 00 - 4

1. Self Ignition Temperature: Minimum 650 degrees F when tested in accordance with ASTM D1929.

2. Smoke Developed Index: Maximum 450 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or maximum 75 when tested in accordance with ASTM D2843 in thickness for intended use.

C. Fire Rated Door Glazing: Tested in accordance with one of the following and complying with NFPA 80. 1. NFPA 252; with neutral pressure level at 40 inches maximum above sill at 5 minutes into

test. 2. UL 10C.

D. Apply label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction to identify each fire rated glass lite.



B. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F.

C. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.

B. Furnish 10 year warranty to include coverage for sealed glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufactures: 1. AGC 2. Guardian 3. PPG 4. Technical Glass Products

2.2 FLOAT GLASS

A. Flat Glass: Minimum 1/4 inch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1 clear type, Quality Q3, float

glass.


Glazing 08 80 00 - 5

a. Furnish annealed glass except where heat strengthened or tempered glass is required to meet specified performance requirements.

2. Heat Strengthened Glass: ASTM C1048, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3, Kind HS heat strengthened, Condition A uncoated, float glass. a. Furnish heat-strengthened glass where annealed glass cannot meet specified

performance requirements. 3. Tempered Glass: ASTM C1048, Type 1 transparent flat, Quality Q3, Kind FT fully

tempered, Condition A uncoated, float glass with horizontal tempering. a. Furnish tempered glass where heat strengthened glass cannot meet specified

performance requirements or is indicated herein.

B. Safety Glass: Conform to CPSC 16 CFR 1201, Category II, minimum thickness 1/4 inch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Tempered Glass: ASTM C1048, Type 1 transparent flat, Quality Q3, Kind FT fully

tempered, Condition A uncoated, float glass with horizontal tempering.

2.3 FIRE RESISTIVE GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Fire-rated glass ceramic clear and wireless glazing material listed for use in non-impact safety-rated locations such as transoms and borrowed lites with fire rating requirements ranging from 20 to 90 minutes with required hose stream test.

B. Properties: 1. Thickeness: 3/16 inch 2. Fire-rating: 20 to 90 minutes, as noted on drawings. 3. Weight: 2.4 lbs./sq. ft. 4. Approximate Visible Transmission: 88 percent. 5. Approximate Visible Reflection: 9 percent. 6. Impact Safety Resistance: ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16CFR1201 (Cat. I). 7. Positive Pressure Test: UL 10C, UBC 7-2 and 7-4; passes.

2.4 PLASTIC GLAZING PRODUCTS

A. Plastic Glazing: Conform to ANSI Z97.1 weathering requirements and CPSC 16 CFR 1201 Category II when used as safety glazing. 1. Polycarbonate safety glazing plastic compound, clear; ultraviolent stabilized; acrylate

non-yellowing coating for scratch resistance. a. Thickness: 1/4 inch

2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Materials compatible with adjacent materials including glass, plastic and glazing channels.

B. Dense Gaskets: Resilient extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; black color. 1. Neoprene: ASTM C864. 2. EPDM: ASTM C864. 3. Silicone: ASTM C1115.


Glazing 08 80 00 - 6

C. Soft Gaskets: ASTM C509; resilient extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; black color. 1. Neoprene. 2. EPDM. 3. Silicone.

D. Pre-Formed Glazing Tape: Size to suit application. 1. Preformed butyl compound; 10 to 15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release

paper; black color. a. Butyl Corner Sealant: ASTM C920 single component non-skinning butyl compatible

with glazing tape; color to match tape.

2.6 GLAZING ACCESSORIES

A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material recommended by glass manufacturer, ASTM C864, Neoprene or EPDM, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.

B. Spacer Shims: Elastomeric material recommended by glass manufacturer, ASTM C864 Option, Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of glazing stop x thickness to suit application.

C. Glazing Splines: ASTM C864 Option, resilient neoprene extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot. 1. Color: Black.

D. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.

E. Fire-Resistant Glazing Materials: Materials used to obtain required fire-resistant rating.

F. Plastic Glazing Materials: Materials compatible per manufactures recommendations.

G. Ball bearing track system for sliding 1/4" glass window. Zinc plated steel double channel track system with recessed bottom track. 1. Product quality standard: Knape & Vogt Roll-Ezy Ball Bearing Track, Model 999 and

995. 2. Provide locking hardware for sliding glass window.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify openings for glazing are correctly sized and within acceptable tolerance.


Glazing 08 80 00 - 7

C. Verify surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions impeding moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.

B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.

C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Perform installation in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual. 1. Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C1193. 2. Fire Rated Openings: Comply with NFPA 80.

B. Exterior Dry Method (Gasket Glazing): 1. Cut glazing gasket to length; install on glazing pane. Seal corners by butting tape and

sealing junctions with compatible butyl sealant. 2. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. 3. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to

attain full contact. 4. Install removable stops without displacing glazing spline. Exert pressure for full

continuous contact.

C. Interior Dry Method (Tape and Tape) Installation: 1. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch above

sight line. 2. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. 3. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane

or unit. 4. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above. 5. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full

continuous contact. 6. Knife trim protruding tape.

D. Interior Wet Method (Compound and Compound) Installation: 1. Install glazing resting on setting blocks. Install applied stop and center pane by use of

spacer shims at 24 inch centers, kept 1/4 inch below sight line. 2. Locate and secure glazing pane using glazers' clips. 3. Fill gaps between glazing and stops with glazing compound until flush with sight line.

Tool surface to straight line.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning.

B. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.


Glazing 08 80 00 - 8

C. Remove labels after Work is complete.

D. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.


A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Protecting installed construction.

B. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste. Do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units.

3.6 SCHEDULE

A. Type G1: Clear Laminated Polycarbonate

B. Type G2: 1/4-inch, Clear Float Glass, Tempered where required by codes.

C. Type G3: 1/4-inch, Clear Ceramic Glass. 1. Vision panel glazing in fire-rated doors or framed openings.

END OF SECTION


Gypsum Board Assemblies

09 21 16-1

SECTION 09 21 16

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Metal stud framing.

2. Shaft wall system.

3. Horizontal metal suspension system.

4. Gypsum board and joint treatment.

5. Cementitious backer board for tile.

6. Acoustic insulation.


1. Section 06 10 53 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking.

2. Section 08 31 13 - Access Doors and Frames: Metal access panels.

3. Section 09 51 13 - Acoustical Panel Ceilings: Installation of acoustical insulation

above ceilings.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials:

1. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint

Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board.

2. ASTM C514 - Standard Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum

Board.

3. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal

Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications.

4. ASTM C557 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum

Wallboard to Wood Framing.

5. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members.

6. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal

Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.

7. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members

to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products.

8. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum

Board.

9. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application

of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 in. to

0.112 in. in Thickness.

10. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board.


Building Materials.

12. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne

Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.



09 21 16-2

13. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction

and Materials.

14. ASTM F1667 - Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and

Staples.

B. American Society of Civil Engineers:

1. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

C. Gypsum Association:

1. GA 214 - Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish.

2. GA 216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.

3. GA-253 - Application of Gypsum Sheathing.

4. GA 600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual Sound Control.

D. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed):

1. WH - Certification Listings.

E. Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association:

1. ML/SFA 540 - Lightweight Steel Framing Manual.

2. ML/SFA 920 - Guide Specifications For Metal Furring and Lathing.

F. National Fire Protection Association:

1. NFPA 265 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Room Fire Growth

Contribution of Textile Coverings on Full Height Panels and Walls, Method B.

2. NFPA 286 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Room Fire Growth

Contribution of Wall and Ceiling Interior Finish.

G. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:

1. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate special details associated with fireproofing.

C. Product Data: Submit data on metal framing, gypsum board and sheathing, joint tape;

decorative finishes and acoustic accessories.


A. Perform Work in accordance with ASTM C840, ASTM C1280, GA-214, GA-216, GA-

600, ML/SFA 540, ML/SFA 920, as applicable.

B. Fire Rated Construction: Rating as indicated on Drawings.

1. Tested Rating: Determined in accordance with ASTM E119.

2. Prescriptive Rating: Determined in accordance with applicable code.

3. Fire Rated Partitions: 1 hour listed assembly by UL, or approved equivalent.



09 21 16-3

4. Fire Rated Shaft Wall Requirements: 1 hour listed assembly by UL, or approved

equivalent.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS


with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three

years documented experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. Performance / Design Criteria:

1. Select stud thickness to resist minimum 5 psf uniform load and maximum 1/360

deflection.

a. Stud size, thickness and spacing indicated on Drawings are minimum

requirements.

2. Conform to applicable code for fire rated assemblies indicated.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Framing Materials:

1. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, 22 gauge minimum, C

shape, with knurled faces.

2. Furring, Framing, and Accessories: ASTM C645.

3. Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard providing required

fire resistance rating.

4. Fasteners: ASTM C1002.

5. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, screws, and other metal supports, of type and

size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place.

6. Adhesive: ASTM C557.

B. Horizontal Metal Suspension System:

1. Furring Channels: Formed steel, hat-shaped, minimum 20 gauge, 2 ½ inches

deep x 7/8 inch high; galvanized.

2. Main Ceiling Channels: Formed steel, minimum 16 gauge, 3/4 inch deep x 1-1/2

inch high, single piece, no splicing; galvanized.

3. Hangers: Galvanized rolled steel sections, of size and type to suit application, to

rigidly support soffit components in place to deflection limits as indicated;

galvanized.

4. Lateral Bracing: Formed steel, minimum 0.060 inch thick, size and length as

required; galvanized.

C. Gypsum Board Materials: Type X fire resistant where indicated on Drawings.



09 21 16-4

1. Standard Gypsum Board: ASTM C36; 5/8 inch thick, maximum available length

in place; ends square cut, tapered edges.

2. Fire Rated Gypsum Board: ASTM C36; fire resistive type, UL or WH rated; 5/8

inch thick, maximum available length in place; ends square cut, tapered edges.

3. Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C630/C630M; 5/8 inch thick,

maximum available length in place; ends square cut, tapered edges.

4. Exterior Soffit Board (ESB): ASTM C931/C931M; standard type, 5/8 inch thick,

maximum available length in place; ends square cut, tapered edges.

5. Gypsum Coreboard: ASTM C442, 1 inch thick, maximum available size in place;

square edges, ends square cut.

6. Abuse Resistant Board (ARB): ASTM C1278; fiber reinforced, paperless

gypsum panels, 5/8 inch thick, maximum available size in place; tapered edges,

ends square cut.

a. Performance characteristics per ASTM C1629:

1) Abrasion: Level 1.

2) Indentation: Level 1.

3) Soft Body Impact: Level 2.

4) Hard Body Impact: Level 1.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Sound Attenuation Blankets (Batts): ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type,

unfaced, 3 ½ inches thick, or as indicated.

B. Thermal Batt Insulation for exterior stud walls: ASTM C665; Non-combustible,

lightweight, semi-rigid stone wool batt insulation.

1. Size: 16 x48 inches.

2. Thickness: 6 inches.

3. R value / 1 inch at 75 degrees F.

C. Acoustic Sealant: Non-hardening, non-skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum

board.

D. Corner Beads, Edge Trim and Expansion Joints: Metal.

E. Edge Trim: GA-216; Type LC bead and Type L bead as applicable.

F. Corner Trim: Heavy duty corner trim; extruded aluminum alloy; 3/8" exposed corner trim

with drywall flange.

G. Joint Materials: ASTM C475; reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, and water.

H. Fasteners: ASTM C954; length to suit application.

I. Anchorage: Tie wire, nails, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application;

to rigidly secure materials in place, galvanized.

J. Tie Wire: Annealed galvanized steel.



09 21 16-5

K. Deflection Track: Top runner designed to allow partition heads to expand and contract

with movement of structure above while maintaining continuity of the assembly. Comply

with the requirements of ASTM C 645.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify site conditions are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as instructed

by manufacturer.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Metal Stud Installation:

1. Install studs in accordance with ASTM C754, ASTM C1007, GA-216 and GA-

600.

2. Metal Stud Spacing: 16 inches on center.

3. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending stud framing through

ceiling to structure above. Maintain clearance under structural building members

to avoid deflection transfer to studs.

a. Provide slip or cushion type joint between partition and structure as

recommended by stud manufacturer to prevent transfer of structural

loads or movements to partitions, and to provide lateral support.

b. Provide deflection track.

4. Door Opening Framing: Install double studs at door frame jambs. Install stud

tracks on each side of opening, at frame head height, and between studs and

adjacent studs.

5. Backer Plates and Blocking: Install backer plates or wood blocking for support of

plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, hardware,

and similar items.

B. Wall Furring Installation:

1. Erect wall furring for direct attachment to concrete masonry and concrete walls.

2. Erect furring channels vertically; space maximum 16 inches oc, not more than 2

inches from floor and ceiling lines or abutting walls. Secure in place on alternate

channel flanges at maximum 16 inches on center.

3. Erect metal stud framing tight to concrete and concrete masonry walls, attached

by adjustable furring brackets.

C. Ceiling Framing Installation:

1. Install in accordance with ASTM C754.

2. Coordinate location of hangers with other work.

3. Install ceiling framing independent of walls, columns, and above ceiling work.

4. Reinforce openings in ceiling suspension system which interrupt main carrying

channels or furring channels, with lateral channel bracing. Extend bracing

minimum 24 inches past each end of openings.

5. Laterally brace entire suspension system.



09 21 16-6

D. Furring For Fire Ratings: Install furring as required for fire resistance ratings indicated

and to GA-600 requirements.

E. Shaft Wall and Ceiling Framing: To GA-600 requirements. Provide slip or cushioned

joints to isolate shaftwall system. Comply with manufacturer's instructions.

F. Acoustic Accessories Installation:

1. Place acoustic insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings,

behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions,

and tight to items passing through partitions.

2. Seal penetrations of partitions by conduit, pipe, duct work, rough-in boxes, and

similar items.

3. Install acoustic insulation in gaps between steel deck flutes and tops of partitions,

which are not fire-rated. Attach blankets in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.

G. Gypsum Board Installation:

1. Install gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C840, GA-216 and GA-600.

2. Erect single layer standard gypsum board in most economical direction, with

ends and edges occurring over firm bearing.

3. Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board vertically, with edges and ends

occurring over firm bearing.

4. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing.

5. Erect exterior gypsum soffit board perpendicular to supports, with staggered end

joints over supports.

6. Place control joints in accordance with referenced standards, consistent with lines

of building spaces and as follows:

a. Install control joints at junction of gypsum board partitions with walls or

partitions of other finish material.

b. Install control joints within long runs of partitions, ceilings or soffits at

approximately 30'-0" on center or as indicated.

7. Place corner beads at external corners. Use longest practical length. Place edge

trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.

H. Joint Treatment:

1. Finish in accordance with GA-214 in accordance with schedule below.

2. Feather coats on to adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.

a. Feather smooth onto attachment legs of wall covering decorative trims so

that transition is not visible in the finished work.


A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from Flat Surface: 1/8 inch in 10

feet.

3.4 SCHEDULES

A. Finishes in accordance with GA-214 Level:

1. Level 1: Above finished ceilings concealed from view.



09 21 16-7

2. Level 4: Walls and ceilings exposed to view.

END OF SECTION


Acoustical Panel Ceilings

09 51 13-1

SECTION 09 51 13

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Acoustic panels. 2. Suspended metal grid ceiling system and perimeter trim.

B. Related Sections: 1. Mechanical: Air diffusion devices in ceiling system. 2. Electrical: Light fixtures in ceiling system.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM C635 - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and

Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.

2. ASTM C636 - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels.

3. ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.


5. ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.

B. Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association: 1. CISCA - Acoustical Ceilings: Use and Practice.

C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit data on metal grid system components, acoustic units and accessories.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning, junctions with other work or

ceiling finishes, interrelation of mechanical and electrical items related to system and sprinkler heads. Indicate method of suspension where interference exists.



09 51 13-2

D. Samples: Submit one sample 6” x 6” inch in size illustrating material and finish of each type of product.

E. Samples: Submit one sample each, 6” inches long, of suspension system main runner, cross runner, perimeter molding, and specially fabricated members.


A. Conform to CISCA requirements.


1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three years documented experience approved by manufacturer.



B. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustic unit installation.

1.7 SEQUENCING

A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Work sequence.

B. Sequence Work to ensure acoustic ceilings are not installed until sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved.

C. Install acoustic units after interior wet work is dry.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

B. Furnish one box or carton of extra ceiling panels of each type to Owner.

C. Extra materials shall be turned over to the Owner prior to installation to insure the availability of goods as extra material.



09 51 13-3

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

A. Performance / Design Criteria: 1. Suspension System: Rigidly secure acoustic ceiling system including integral

mechanical and electrical components with maximum deflection of 1/240 of span.

B. Acoustical Ceiling Panel Type 1 (ACP-1): ASTM E1264, fiberglass panels conforming to the following: 1. Size: 24 x 24 inches. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inches. 3. Fire Hazard Classification: Class A. 4. Light Reflectance: 72 percent. 5. NRC: 0.70. 6. CAC: N/A. 7. Edge: Square 8. Surface Color: White. 9. Surface Finish: Fine texture; non-patterned; perforated 10. Product Availability: Manufacturer’s 30-year Guarantee. 11. Product Quality Standard: ‘Random Fissured' manufactured by Armstrong World

Industries, or approved equivalent.

C. Acoustical Ceiling Panel Type 2 (ACP-2): Open Grid System without panel

D. Acoustical Ceiling Panel Type 3 (ACP-3): ASTM E1264, fiberglass panels conforming to the following: 1. Size: 24 x 48 inches. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inches. 3. Fire Hazard Classification: Class A. 4. Light Reflectance: 72 percent. 5. NRC: 0.70 6. CAC:N/A. 7. Edge: Square. 8. Surface Color: White. 9. Surface Finish: Fine texture; non-patterned; perforated. 10. Product Availability: Manufacturer’s 30-year Guarantee. 11. Product Quality Standard: ‘Random Fissured’ manufactured by Armstrong

World Industries, or approved equivalent.

E. Acoustical Ceiling Panel Type 4 (ACP-4): ASTM E1264, mineral fiber panels conforming to the following: 1. Size: 24 x 24 inches. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inches. 3. Fire Hazard Classification: Class A. 4. Light Reflectance: 82 percent. 5. CAC: 38. 6. Edge: Square.



09 51 13-4

7. Surface Color: white 8. Surface Finish: Perforated, smooth texture 9. Product Quality Standard: ‘Ceramaguard /Ceramaguard Fine Fissured'

manufactured by Armstrong World Industries, or approved equivalent.

F. Grid Type 1 (G1): 1. Non-fire Rated Grid: ASTM C635, intermediate duty; exposed T; components

die cut and interlocking. 2. Grid Materials: Commercial quality cold rolled steel with hot dipped galvanized

coating. 3. Exposed Grid Surface Width: 15/16 inch. 4. Grid Finish: White 5. Accessories: Stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, hold down clips,

required for suspended grid system. 6. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit

application, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified.

G. Grid Type 2 (G2): 1. Non-fire Rated Grid: ASTM C635, intermediate duty; exposed T; components

die cut and interlocking. 2. Grid Materials: Commercial quality cold rolled steel with galvanized coating. 3. Exposed Grid Surface Width: 15/16 inch. 4. Grid Finish: Prefinished paint finish, color as selected from manufacturer's full

range of 180 color selections. 5. Accessories: Stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, hold down clips,

required for suspended grid system. 6. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit

application, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified.

H. Grid Type 3 – Non-Corrosive (G3): 1. Non-fire Rated Grid: ASTM C635, intermediate duty; exposed T; components

die cut and interlocking. 2. Grid Materials: Hot Dipped Galvanized steel with prefinished G90 steel capping

for exterior applications. 3. Exposed Grid Surface Width: 15/16 inch. 4. Grid Finish: White 5. Accessories: Stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, hold down clips,

required for suspended grid system. 6. Support Channels and Hangers: Size and type to suit application, and ceiling

system flatness requirement specified. 7. Product Quality Standard: ‘Prelude XL' manufactured by Armstrong World

Industries, or approved equivalent.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Perimeter Molding Gasket: Closed cell, compressible gasket tape.

B. Perimeter Edge Trim: Extruded aluminum; ¾ inches wide by 2 or 4 inches tall, or as indicated.



09 51 13-5

1. Provide units to accept acoustical ceilings and compatible with grid suspension system.

2. Provide factory mitered outside corners. 3. Finish: Prefinished paint finish; colors as selected from manufacturer’s full range

to match panels and grid. 4. Provide all hangers, splice plates, clips and accessories for a complete

installation.

C. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustic and grid units.

D. Hold Down Clips: Manufacturer’s standard.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.

3.2 DEMOLITION

A. Extend existing acoustical ceiling installations using materials and methods as specified.

B. Clean and repair existing acoustical ceiling grids which remain.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Lay-In Grid Suspension System: 1. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C636 and as supplemented

in this section. 2. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to deflection of 1/240 of span

maximum. 3. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan. 4. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. Coordinate location of

hangers with other work. 5. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit.

Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.

6. Where ducts or other equipment prevent regular spacing of hangers, reinforce nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span extra distance.

7. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners when weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner; or support components independently.

8. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners. 9. Perimeter Molding:

a. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces with continuous gasket.



09 51 13-6

b. Use longest practical lengths. c. Miter corners. d. Install at junctions with other interruptions.

10. Install perimeter edge trim in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Acoustic Units: 1. Fit acoustic units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental

to appearance and function. 2. Lay directional patterned units one way with pattern parallel to longest shortest

room axis in basket weave pattern. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.

3. Install units after above ceiling work is complete. 4. Install acoustic units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and

dents. 5. Cutting Acoustic Units:

a. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim. 6. Where bullnose concrete block corners round obstructions occur, install

preformed closures to match perimeter molding. 7. Install hold-down clips to retain panels tight to grid system within 5 ft of exterior

doors.

C. Perimeter Conditions: In spaces where the location of ceiling grid result in a ceiling panel less than 4-inches wide along the perimeter, omit the last grid piece and provide a matching 24 x 48 ceiling panel cut to fit. Ceiling panel size shall not exceed 24 x 28 inches.


A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances: 1. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 2. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2

degrees.

3.5 SCHEDULE

A. Acoustical Ceiling Panel Type 1 (ACP-1): Locations as indicated in the Finish Schedule. 1. Grid Type: G1.

B. Acoustical Ceiling Panel Type 2 (ACP-2): Locations as indicated in the Finish Schedule. 1. Grid Type: G2.

C. Acoustical Ceiling Panel Type 4 (ACP-3): Locations as indicated in the Finish Schedule. 1. Grid Type: G1.

D. Acoustical Ceiling Panel Type 5 (ACP-5): Locations as indicated in the Finish Schedule. 1. Grid Type: G3.

END OF SECTION


Wood Athletic Flooring 09 64 02-1

SECTION 09 64 02

WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: All work specified in this section are part of an Alternate bid item. 1. Site-finished wood flooring consisting of the following:

a. Sheet vapor retarder. b. Pre-manufactured subfloor panels. c. Resilient pads.

2. Vented resilient base. 3. Game markings. 4. Transition Ramps. 5. Protective Floor Covering.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 00 31 00 - Available Project Information: Hazardous Materials

Investigation Report. 2. Section 01 20 00 - Price and Payment Procedures: Add Alternate. 3. Section 08 70 00 - Door Hardware: Aluminum Cover Plate 4. Section 11 50 00 - Athletic Equipment: Floor sleeves for volleyball equipment. 5. Section 12 76 00 - Telescopic Stands

1.2 REFERENCES

A. APA-The Engineered Wood Association: 1. APA/EWA PS 1 - Voluntary Product Standard for Construction and Industrial

Plywood.

B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of

Materials.

C. Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association: 1. MFMA - MFMA Guide Specifications.

D. DIN - Performance Standard DIN 18032, Part 2, 2001.

E. OSHA -Occupational Safety and Health Administration: 1. Standards for compliance for penetrating through asbestos-containing floor

tile/mastic.


A. Vapor Retarder Permeance: Maximum 1 perm when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M, desiccant method.



B. Flooring system shall have been independently tested and meets or exceeds all Athletic Performance requirements according to the International Standard DIN 18032, Part 2, 2001. Final performance results do not allow averaging non-compliant test points to achieve DIN compliance.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit data for flooring system and floor finish materials.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate floor joint pattern and termination details. 1. Indicate provisions for expansion and contraction, base, base corner details and

game insert or socket devices. 2. Indicate location, size, design and color of game markings.

D. Samples: Submit two samples 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating floor finish, color, and sheen.

E. Samples of paint colors for game lines.

F. Samples of protective floor covering.

G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit standard and special installation procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. Include manufacturer's recommendations for accessory products.



B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-finishing, stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes.


A. Perform Work in accordance with MFMA - Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association.

B. Products: Stamp MFMA mill number and grade on underside of each piece of wood flooring at factory.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS


B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience and approved by the flooring system manufacturer.



1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.

B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.

C. Review installation procedures including procedures for acclimation of flooring materials.


A. Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Requirements for ambient condition control facilities for product storage and installation.

B. Do not install wood flooring until wet construction work is complete and ambient air at installation space has moisture content stabilized between 35 and 50 percent and temperature is stabilized between 65 and 80 degrees F. 1. Do not install wood flooring until wood materials have been acclimated to

ambient temperature and humidity conditions for minimum of seven days. Stack wood for acclimation procedures to facilitate cross-ventilation of wood materials.

2. Do not store wood flooring in contact with concrete or masonry.

C. Provide heat, light, and ventilation prior to installation and maintain during and after installation.

D. Maintain room temperature and humidity for period of one week prior to delivery of materials to installation space, during installation, and continuously after installation.


A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

B. Supply 10 square feet of extra wood flooring material.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Furnish minimum one year warranty that the materials supplied are free from manufacturing defects.

B. Furnish protective covering tile manufacturer’s standard, five-year limited warranty.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD FLOORING SYSTEM (WD-1)

A. Wood Flooring System is an “Alternate” product; refer to Section 01 20 00.

B. Product Quality Standard:



1. Connor Sports Flooring Corporation; “Focus Fixed Resilient Flooring System”, or approved equivalent.

C. Total nominal depth of flooring system: 1-3/4 inches.

D. Wood Strip Flooring: Northern Hard Maple; “Connor Laytite Maple” or approved equivalent. 1. Grade: Second and better. 2. Actual Thickness: 25/32 inch. 3. Actual Width: 2-1/4 inches. 4. Edge: Tongue and Groove.

E. Fasteners: Type recommended by flooring manufacturer.

F. Subflooring: 3/4 inch minimum, 7-ply plywood, pre-manufactured subfloor panels with machined pad slots, anchor pockets and attached resilient pads for full surface plate subfloor. 1. Integrated with attachment of extending edges on all sides. 2. Installation method of subfloor shall include special anchorage tool to prevent

excessive compression of resilient elements.

G. Resilient Pads: 9/16 inch x 1 inch x 48 inch resilient pads 1. Aligned continuously perpendicular to flooring direction, average spacing of 8

inch on center. 2. Closed cell polyethylene foam shall not be included as a resilient component.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Vapor Barrier: Polyethylene sheet, 6 mil thick; 2 inch wide tape for joint sealing.

B. Base Materials: 1. Ventilating Base: Molded rubber, 4 inch high with 3 inch toe, pre-molded outside

corners, ventilating type, with adhesives and accessories, color as selected from manufacturer’s standards.

C. Floor Finish: Polyurethane, to achieve high gloss surface; type recommended by flooring manufacturer.

D. Floor Sealer: Type recommended by flooring manufacturer.

E. Marking Paint: Type recommended by flooring manufacturer.

F. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer.

G. Transition Strip Ramps: 1. Product Quality Standard: Safepath Products; Van Duerr Industries, Inc. 2. Composition: 100 percent reclaimed 20 mesh minus crumb rubber with urethane

binders, formed by compression molding. 3. Standard heights of single or multiple piece construction. 4. Attributes:



a. Tensile Strength: Minimum 630 PSI, tested to ASTM 412. b. Compression: Maximum 7.84 percent, tested to ASTM D395. c. Hardness: Shore A 65, tested to ASTM D2240. d. Absorption: Maximum 0.75 percent, tested to ASTM C1026. e. Density: 1.01 grams per cubic meter.

5. Performance requirements: a. Static coefficient of friction; tested to ASTM C1028:

1) Dry: 0.95 2) Wet: 0.79

b. Fixed angle walking: Static coefficient of friction of 0.50 tested for bare foot, Red Wing Iris walking shoes, Converse 2D 1292 tennis shoes, and Naturalizer 78ON73 wedge sandals; tested using male and female personnel facing up and down slope at angle of 27 degrees with running water.

6. Adhesive: Single-component, non-corrosive silicone type; Sikaflex-1a Sika Corporation.

7. Patching Compound: Type approved by transition manufacturer.

H. Gym Floor Protective Covering: 1. Loose Lay Carpet Tiles:

a. Type: 100% solution-dyed polypropylene with polyolefin plus backing. b. Thickness: 6 mm c. Size: 39-3/8” x 78-3/4” d. Quantity: 370 tiles e. Color: Selected by Architect from standard colors f. Product Quality Standard: Pro Shield by Mats, Inc.

2. Storage Carts: Pro Shield Gym Floor Tile Cart a. Type: Heavy duty steel frame with carpeted plywood platform b. Features: 5” broad based wheel casters and removable 29” handle c. Size: 36"x72" d. Quantity: Five (5)

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Inspect areas to receive flooring before starting work. Verify that the surfaces to receive Wood Athletic Flooring meet the minimum requirements established by the flooring manufacturer.

C. Wood Athletic Flooring system to be installed over existing vinyl composition tile floor finish. The existing mastic beneath the vinyl composition tile has tested positive for asbestos. Penetrations through the existing vinyl composition tile and mastic to be in accordance with OSHA guidelines for encapsulation of asbestos within the existing tile mastic.



D. Verify existing vinyl composition tile subfloor surface is smooth and flat to plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

E. Do not install wood floors until all masonry, painting, tile and overhead work is complete in adjacent areas.

F. The existing vinyl composition tile subfloor shall be dry, free of foreign objects and broom clean prior to installation.

G. Do not proceed with work until defects have been corrected. Starting of work implies acceptance of area to receive flooring and base.

H. Coordinate placement of floor sleeves for Athletic Equipment as indicated on drawings.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrate to receive wood flooring in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Broom clean substrate.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Cover existing vinyl composition tile with polyethylene vapor barrier, sealing and lapping joints 6” minimum.

B. Subfloor: 1. Arrange panels in a staggered brick pattern perpendicular to finished flooring

direction with panel ends offset 48 inches in alternating rows. Attach overlapping side and end joints of adjacent panels by applying ribbon of subfloor adhesive and 3/4 inch staples at 12 inches on center.

2. Provide nominal 1/4" spacing between panel edges, and provide 1 1/2" expansion voids at perimeter and all vertical obstructions. Install solid blocking at doorways, under bleachers in the stacked position and below portable goals.

3. Secure panels though existing vinyl composition tile into existing concrete with steel anchors into anchor pockets provided. Maintain proper anchor penetration with installation tools and procedures complying with OSHA regulation standards for compliance for penetrating through asbestos-containing floor tile/mastic.

C. Wood Flooring: 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Lay maple flooring parallel to length of room areas. Verify alignment as work

progresses. 3. Provide 1-1/2” expansion space around perimeter and at all other vertical

obstructions. 4. Terminate flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is

dissimilar. Provide divider strips.



5. System construction shall include manufactured method of stop blocking throughout entire floor for protective resilient pad housing and full subfloor support under significant non-athletic loads.

D. Install base at floor perimeter to cover expansion space. Miter inside corners and use pre-molded outside corners.

E. Install floor sleeves to depth sufficient to ensure flush top surface with floor surface.

F. Finishing: 1. Mask off adjacent surfaces before beginning sanding. 2. Sand flooring to smooth even finish with no evidence of sander marks. Take

precautions to contain dust. Remove dust by vacuum. 3. Apply at least two coats of sealer and two coats of finish. Apply sealer and finish

per manufacturer's instructions. 4. Clean and buff floor between each coat. 5. Paint basketball and volleyball colored game lines between sealer and first coat

of finish.

3.4 CLEANING


B. Clean and polish floor surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.



B. Prohibit traffic on floor finish for 72 hours minimum after installation.

C. Coordinate construction schedule to preclude the necessity of flooring protection of the Wood Athletic Flooring.

3.6 SCHEDULES

A. “Focus Fixed Resilient Flooring System” by Connor Sports Flooring Corporation, or approved equivalent, placed over vapor barrier, over existing vinyl composition tile subfloor with four coat polyurethane finish.

END OF SECTION


Resilient Flooring

09 65 00-1

SECTION 09 65 00

RESILIENT FLOORING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes resilient sheet flooring; resilient tile flooring; resilient base; and resilient

stair accessories.


1. Section 03 54 00 - Cast Underlayment

2. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Stage Platform

3. Division 26: Floor mounted electrical outlets.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials:


Building Materials.

2. ASTM E662 - Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke

Generated by Solid Materials.

3. ASTM F1066 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile.

4. ASTM F1303 - Standard Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with

Backing.

5. ASTM F1344 - Standard Specification for Rubber Floor Tile.

6. ASTM F1700 - Standard Specification for Solid Vinyl Floor Tile.

7. ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base.

B. Federal Specification Unit:

1. FS RR-T-650 - Treads, Metallic and Nonmetallic, Skid Resistant.

C. National Fire Protection Association:

1. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux for Floor

Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.

D. Scientific Certification Systems:

1. SCS EC10.2 - Environmental Certification Program Indoor Air Quality

Performance.

E. South Coast Air Quality Management District:

1. SCAQMD Rule 1113 - Architectural Coatings.

2. SCAQMD Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



Resilient Flooring

09 65 00-2

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan, custom patterns and inlay designs.

C. Product Data: Submit data describing physical and performance characteristics; including

sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.

1. Include data on adhesive and other accessory materials and manufacturer's

certificates indicating approval for the proposed application.

D. Samples:

1. Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for initial selection.

2. Submit two samples, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each

resilient flooring product specified.

E. Submit evidence from the manufacturer of approval of the Installer.

F. Submit manufacturer's standard warranty.



B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance procedures, recommended

maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.


A. Conform to applicable code for fire performance ratings as follows:

1. Flooring, flame spread: Maximum 75, per ASTM E84.

2. Flooring, smoke developed: Maximum 450, per ASTM E662.

3. Wall base, flame spread: Maximum 75, per ASTM E84.

4. Wall base, smoke developed: Maximum 450, per ASTM E662.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS


with minimum three years experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three

years experience.



B. Deliver materials in an undamaged condition and in the original containers with unbroken

seals and labels intact.

C. Store in a maintained environment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

D. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end.


Resilient Flooring

09 65 00-3



B. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F.

C. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at

temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain

conditions above 55 degrees F.

D. Flooring should not be installed before the concrete subfloor has cured for a minimum of

thirty (30) days.

E. Moisture content of the concrete slab must not exceed 3 lbs. per 1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours

when using the calcium chloride test.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance

products.

B. Furnish 75 sq ft of flooring, 25 lineal feet of base, and 5 percent of installed stair

materials of each type and color specified.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPONENTS

A. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT-1):

1. Provide products in accordance with the Finish Schedule, or approved equivalent.

B. Resilient Sheet Flooring (SF-1):


C. Resilient Base (VB-1, 2,3):


2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Subfloor Filler: Premix latex, type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer.

B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer.

C. Resilient Moldings and Edge Strips: Same material as flooring.

D. Edging: Standard vinyl stair nosing, 3” x 2” size.


Resilient Flooring

09 65 00-4

E. Sheet Flooring Vinyl Welding Rod: Solid vinyl bead produced by manufacturer of vinyl

flooring for heat welding seams, in color matching field color.

F. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer.

G. Vinyl Stair Tread: Heavy duty square nose profile; length to suit existing stair condition;

color as selected from manufacturer's full range.

H. Vinyl Stair Riser: 0.80 Gauge; 0'-7"x4'-0"; color as selected from manufacturer's full

range.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions

before starting Work.

B. Verify concrete floors are dry to maximum moisture content as recommended by

manufacturer, and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, and dusting.

C. Verify stage platform framing and subfloor in accordance with Section 06 10 00 - Rough

Carpentry, in preparation for sheet flooring finish.

D. Verify floor and lower wall surfaces are free of substances capable of impairing adhesion

of new adhesive and finish materials.

E. Do not proceed with work until defects have been corrected. Starting of work implies

acceptance of area to receive flooring and base.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other

defects with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface.

1. Trowel patching compound on sub-base in layers not to exceed l/8 inch and

feather edge out to obtain level and smooth surface.

B. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.

C. Clean substrate.

3.3 INSTALLATION - SHEET FLOORING

A. Prepare wood subfloor to provide a smooth surface that is dry, smooth and free of

moisture, oil, dirt, greases and waxes. Fill minor imperfections, damaged areas and

knotholes. Level or patch wood subfloor with latex underlayment. Sand with medium

grade sandpaper to remove trowel marks.


Resilient Flooring

09 65 00-5

B. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to longer room dimensions, to produce

minimum number of seams. Lay out seams to avoid widths less than 1/3 of roll width;

match patterns carefully at seams.

C. Apply latex adhesive per strict accordance to manufacturer's installation instructions.

D. Double cut sheet; provide heat welded seams.

E. Where floor finishes are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under

centerline of door.

F. Install resilient edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates,

and where indicated. Secure resilient strips by adhesive.

G. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to

produce tight joints.

H. Install flooring in recessed floor access covers. Maintain floor pattern.

I. Install feature strips where indicated. Fit joints tightly.

3.4 INSTALLATION - VINYL COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING

A. Mix tile from containers to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed.

B. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines or at 45 degrees as indicated

to produce symmetrical tile pattern.

C. Install tile to pattern with accent colors as indicated. Allow minimum 1/3 full size tile

width at room or area perimeter.

D. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to

produce tight joints.

E. Where floor finishes are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under

centerline of door.

F. Install resilient edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates,

and where indicated. Install flooring in recessed floor access covers. Maintain floor

pattern.

3.5 INSTALLATION - BASE

A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between

joints.

B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, 'V' cut back of base strip to 2/3 of its

thickness and fold. At exposed ends, use premolded units.


Resilient Flooring

09 65 00-6

C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.

D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.

E. Base to be installed from continuous rolls without corner pieces for coved style.

F. Base to be installed in lengths with mitered corners for woodwork style.

3.6 CLEANING


B. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.

C. Clean, seal, and maintain resilient flooring products.


A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Protecting installed

construction.

B. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation.

END OF SECTION


Resilient Athletic Flooring 09 66 00-1

SECTION 09 66 00

RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes recycled resilient athletic roll flooring installed over loose-lay vented slip sheet system and fully adhered slip sheet system, base, underlayment and accessories.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 20 00 – Price and Payment Procedures: Alternate flooring. 2. Section 11 50 00 - Athletic Equipment: Volleyball Floor Sleeves. 3. Section 12 76 00 - Telescopic Stands.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering

Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.


A. Fire Test Characteristics: As determined by testing identical product according to ASTM E648, Class 1, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Athletic Performance Properties: Comply with ASTM F2772-11 Performance Level Class 2 for force reduction, ball bounce, vertical deformation and surface friction.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data for each type of product indicated. Include data on adhesive and other accessory materials and manufacturer's certificates indicating approval for the proposed application.

C. Installation and Maintenance Procedures: Submit manufacturer’s requirements for correct preparation, finishing and testing of substrate base material to receive prefabricated rubber sport surfaces. Include manufacturer’s maintenance instructions for products specified.

D. Samples of each type of product and color, as indicated on finish/color schedule.

E. Shop Drawing: Indicate floor pattern layout, size and materials. 1. Indicate extents of fully adhered application under telescopic bleachers.

F. Submit evidence from the manufacturer of approval of the Installer.



G. Submit manufacturer's standard warranty.



B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule.

C. Warranty: Submit manufacturers standard warranty.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS


B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience, approved by the manufacturer.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING


B. Deliver and store materials in an undamaged condition and in the original containers with unbroken seals and labels intact.

C. Store in a maintained environment of minimum of 55 degrees F. and under 50% relative humidity. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for storage and handling.

D. Store rolls in an upright position on a smooth flat surface immediately upon delivery to the Project.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS


B. Maintain materials and areas to receive materials between 65 degrees F. and 85 degrees F. for at least one week prior to installation and for at least one week after installation.

C. Manufacturers instructions to be followed.

D. Maintain a minimum temperature of 55 degrees F. after material is installed.

E. Prohibit traffic during flooring installation and for at least 48 hours after flooring installation.

F. Moisture content of the concrete slab must not exceed 3 lbs. per 1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours when using the calcium chloride test.

G. Install flooring only after other finishing work, including painting and overhead work, has been completed.



1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

B. Furnish additional quantities of flooring equal to 2.0 percent of the amount installed for each type and color.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of flooring with: 1. Game line placement. 2. Volleyball sleeves. 3. Telescopic bleacher bay locations.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ATHLETIC FLOORING (SF-1)

A. Basis of Design: Gerflor Taraflex Flooring (Sport M Plus) with Isolsport vented vinyl-sheet system with both loose-lay and fully adhered installations, or approved equivalent.

B. Product Description: Dual-durometer, foam-backed sheet vinyl flooring. 1. Overall Thickness: Not less than 0.28 inch (7 mm) 2. Wear-layer Thickness: Not less than 0.08 inch (2.1 mm) 3. Foam Backing: Very high density, two layer, dual-durometer, closed cell foam

with reinforced fiberglass grid. 4. Seaming Method: Heat welded 5. Adhesive Method:

a. Sport Flooring: Full-spread adhesive to completely adhere sport flooring to the top of the vented slip-sheet layer.

b. Vented Slip-sheet: Loose-lay installation over substrate. 6. Bacteriostatic and Fungicidal Treatment: Manufacturer's factory-applied

permanent treatment throughout the flooring material. a. Basis of Design Product: Gerflor Sanosol

7. Applied Finish: Manufacturer's, factory applied, permanent and UV-cured. a. No-Wax finish: Published product literature identifying factory applied

finish as 'No-Wax-Just clean and rinse.' b. Basis of Design Product: Gerflor Protecsol.

8. Roll Size: minimum of 59 inches wide. 9. Color and Pattern:

a. As selected by Owner from manufacturer's standard colors and patterns.

C. Performance Criteria: 1. ASTM F2772-11 Indoor Sport Floor Standard:

a. Provide certification of compliance for the four ASTM F2772 Indoor Sport Floor Standard performance categories: 1) Shock Absorption/Force Reduction: Class C2 (22% to 33 %):

Pass. 2) Ball Bounce: Minimum 90%: Pass 3) Surface Effect/ Coefficient of Friction: Between 80-110: Pass 4) Vertical deformation: Maxium 3.5 mm: Pass



2. Static Load Limit/Residual Indentation: a. ASTM F1202; pas Static Load Resistance requirement of less than 0.005

inch of residual indentation as tested per ASTM F970 at prescribed test load of 175 psi.

b. EN 1516; Pass, Less than or equal to 0.5 mm. 3. Resistance to Rolling Load: ED 1569; Pass 4. Chemical Resistance: ASTM D543; OK 5. Impact Resistance: EN 1517; Pass 6. Abrasion Resistance: EN ISO 5470; Pass 7. Sound Insulation: EN ISO 717; 18 dB 8. Gloss/Brightness: EN ISO 2813; Pass 9. Organic Emission: ASTM D 5116; Pass 10. Fire Performance: ASTM E 648; Greater than 0.45 W/cm2, Class 1. 11. Slab Moisture Tolerance Installed with Vented Slip-Sheet System:

a. Maximum relative humidity of 92 percent when tested according to ASTM F2170.

b. Maximum moisture vapor emission rate of 10 pounds of water per 1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours when tested according to ASTM F1869.

2.2 VENTED SLIP-SHEET LAY UNDERLAYMENT SYSTEM:

A. Basis of Design Product: Gerflor Taraflex Isolsport

B. Description: Vented slip-sheet vinyl layer installed between the substrate and resilient athletic flooring 1. Bottom Texture: Raised Texture on the bottom side permits moderate moisture

vapor emission to escape and vent. Systems that are smooth or have indented texture on the bottom side are not acceptable.

2. Overall thickness: Not less than 1.65 mm. 3. Installation Methods: Loose laid over existing floor with fully adhered sections

under telescopic bleachers as indicated on drawings.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Moldings and Edge Strips: Vinyl, configuration as applicable for conditions.

B. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compound: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement based formulation approved by athletic flooring manufacturer.

C. Adhesive for adhering Sport floor to top of vented slip-sheet: 1. Water-resistance type recommended by athletic flooring manufacturer. 2. Basis of Design Product: Mapei G19, G21 or simliar 2-part urethane adhesive

D. Heat Welding Rod: As supplied by indoor resilient athletic flooring manufacturer. Color shall blend with resilient athletic flooring color.

E. Game-Line and Marker Paint: Complete system including primer, compatible with flooring and recommended by flooring and paint manufacturers.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Inspect areas to receive flooring and base before starting work. Verify that the surfaces to receive flooring meet the minimum requirements established by the flooring manufacturer.

B. Subfloors shall not vary more than l/8 inch in any ten foot dimension when measured according to ASTM E 1155.

C. Moisture content of the substrate shall not exceed manufacturer’s recommendations at time of floor installation.

D. Do not proceed with work until defects have been corrected. Starting of work implies acceptance of area to receive flooring and base.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Fill cracks, minor pits and depressions in surface of concrete sub-base with patching compound in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Trowel patching compound on sub-base in layers not to exceed l/8 inch and feather edge out to obtain level and smooth surface.

C. Sweep and then vacuum substrates immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrate for moisture, alkaline salts, grid, dust or other contamination. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 INSTALLATION – ROLL FLOORING

A. Install flooring in strict accordance with the manufacturer's current printed instructions.

B. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated.

C. Fit flooring neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, equipment anchors and other interruptions to floor surface.

D. Minimize number of seams and place them in inconspicuous areas.

E. Stagger seams between vented loose-laid-slip sheet underlayment sections and finish Sport flooring a minimum of 7 inches.

3.4 GAME LINES

A. Layout of game lines as indicated on drawings.

B. Mask flooring at game lines, and apply paint of color indicated to produce clean, sharp and distinct edges.



3.5 CLEANING


B. Remove excess adhesive or other surface blemishes from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage, using neutral type cleaners as recommended by flooring manufacturer.

C. Clean and maintain flooring products per manufacturers' recommendations.



B. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation. Protect installed flooring with heavy Kraft paper or other covering.

END OF SECTION


Fluid-Applied Flooring 09 67 00 - 1

SECTION 09 67 00

FLUID APPLIED FLOORING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes fluid-applied flooring and integral formed base; divider strips and accessories

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast in Place Concrete 2. Section 07 90 00 - Resilient Flooring: Base finish.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM D570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics. 2. ASTM D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. 3. ASTM D695 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics. 4. ASTM D905 - Standard Test Method for Strength Properties of Adhesive Bonds in Shear by

Compression Loading. 5. ASTM D1044 - Standard Test Method for Resistance of Transparent Plastics to Surface

Abrasion. 6. ASTM D1360 - Standard Test Method for Fire Retardancy of Paints (Cabinet Method). 7. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

B. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux for Floor Covering Systems

Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation.

C. Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings shall be furnished showing installation of cove base and termination details, and details at floor material transitions and where adjoining equipment. 1. Locate and provide detailing for flexible joints required for flooring in area of installation.

D. Color Chart: Indicating range of standard color chip options

E. Samples: 1. Submit two samples, 6 x 6 inch, in size illustrating color and pattern for each floor material

for each color specified.




G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention and descriptive data.


A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, procedures for stain removal, repairing surface and suggested schedule for cleaning.


A. Surface Burning Characteristics: 1. Floor Finishes: Class I, minimum 0.45 watts/sq cm when tested in accordance with NFPA

253.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS


B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three years documented experience approved by manufacturer.

1.7 AMBIENT CONDITIONS


B. Store resin materials in dry, secure area.

C. Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability.

D. Illumination: Apply flooring system only where a minimum of 30 foot-candles exist when measured from 3 feet from surface.

E. Advise other trades of fixtures and fittings not to be installed until flooring is cured and protected.

1.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces not scheduled to receive the flooring by masking, or by other means, to maintain these surfaces free of the flooring material.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: Key Resin Company "Key Quartz B-125" grouted and sealed with Key #512 two component UV light resistant epoxy.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Fluid-Applied Flooring: Epoxy, two component, thermosetting for a slip resistant, cleanable textured finish.

B. Flexible Membrane for crack treatment: 100% solids flexible epoxy

C. Aggregates: 1. Blended quartz sand for base. 2. Color coated quarz with a minimum Mohs.. hardness of 6.

D. Matrix: Matrix-epoxy /aggregate composition

E. Grout and Topcoats: Clear two component UV Light resistant epoxy.

F. Integral coved base: 4 inch.

G. Color: as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard patterns.

2.3 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

A. Weight: 1.00 lbs/sq ft. per 1/8 inch thickness.

B. Compressive Strength: 1. ASTM C-579 2. 11,500 psi

C. Tensile Strength: 1. ASTM C-307 2. 2,400 psi

D. Flexural Strength: 1. ASTM C-580 2. 4, 300 psi

E. Indentation: withstands 2,000 psi for 30 minutes without indentation.

F. Impact Resistance: 16 ft/lbs no chipping, cracking or delamination

G. Adhesive Strength to Concrete: 1. ACI Committee 403 2. 300 psi (100% concrete failure)



H. Water Absorption: 1. ASTM D-570 2. 0.10

I. Abrasion Resistance: 1. ASTM C-501 2. 32 mg. max

J. Thermal Shock Resistance: 1. ASTM C-884 2. passes

K. Thermal Coefficient of Expansion: ASTM C-531

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Sub-Floor Filler: Type recommended by flooring material manufacturer for field conditions.

B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify previous floor system has been satisfactorily removed and surfaces are sufficiently uniform for application of new floor system.

C. Verify floor and lower wall surfaces are free of substances capable of impairing adhesion of adhesive and finish materials.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare surfaces as required by manufacturer.

B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler.

C. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Grind irregularities above surface level. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.

D. Clean substrate.

E. Apply primer as required to prevent "bleed-thru" or interference with adhesion by substances that cannot be removed.



3.3 SUBFLOORS

A. Concrete - Concrete must be fully cured and free of moisture. Moisture vapor emissions and moisture content testing must conform with the requirements of ASTM F-1869-98 (Calcium Chloride Test) and ASTM F-2170-02 (Relative Humidity Probe Test). If test results show excess levels of moisture content or vapor emission rate, apply manufacturer's recommended moisture vapor emission control material. 1. Treat cracks in concrete using manufacturer's recommended practice.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Install in strict conformance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Route out all cracks and fill with crack filler approved by Manufacturer of floor materials.

C. Prime entire surface with recommended primer or moisture vapor control treatment, apply prior to installation of crack isolation membrane and also use to fill cracks.

D. Apply epoxy binder and broadcast decorative aggregate in two applications to achieve a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch.

E. Apply UV light resistant epoxy grout coat and topcoats to provide a uniform, dense surface.

F. Integral Cove Base: Provide cove trim strip at top of base as recommended by flooring manufacturer and trowel material up wall to form smooth, integral transition and base 4 inches high.


A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Protecting installed construction.

B. Prohibit traffic on floor finish for 48 hours after installation or until cured.

C. Barricade area to protect flooring until cured.

END OF SECTION


Tile Carpeting 09 68 13 - 1

SECTION 09 68 13

TILE CARPETING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Carpet tile, full spread application with release adhesive. 2. Accessories and transition strips.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring: Base finish.


A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM D2859 - Standard Specification for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile

Floor Covering Materials.

B. Carpet and Rug Institute: 1. CRI Carpet Installation Standard - Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet. 2. CRI Green Label Plus Testing Program. 3. CRI Model Specifications for Commercial Carpets.

C. Consumer Products Safety Commission: 1. CPSC 16 CFR 1630 - Standard for the Surface Flammability of Carpets and Rugs.

D. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux for Floor Covering Systems

Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of joints, direction of carpet pile, location of edge moldings and location of dye lots.

D. Samples: 1. Submit two carpet tiles illustrating color and pattern design for each carpet color selected. 2. Submit two 6-inch long samples of edge strip.



E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention.



B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenance materials.

B. Extra Stock Materials: 1. Furnish 5 percent of carpet tiles of each color and pattern selected.


A. Surface Burning Characteristics: 1. Floor Finishes: Comply with one of the following:

a. Class II, minimum 0.22 watts/sq cm when tested in accordance with NFPA 253. b. CPSC 16 CFR 1630.

B. Texture Appearance Retention Rating: Rating classifications as determined by CRI Model Specifications for Commercial Carpets. 1. Greater than or equal to 3.5 TARR for Severe Traffic Level Classification.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS


B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three years documented experience approved by manufacturer. 1. FCIB or IFCI certified carpet installers.

1.8 AMBIENT CONDITIONS

A. Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Ambient conditions control facilities for product storage and installation.

B. Deliver all materials to the installation site in the manufacture's original packaging and in good condition. Packaging to contain manufacturer's name and marks, identification number, shipping and handling instructions and related information.

C. Delivered and stored materials must be available for inspection as required by owner, architect, general contractor and/or the manufacturer.



D. Store materials in area of installation for 48 hours prior to installation.

E. Store pallets of textile composite flooring modules on a flat surface. Do not double stack pallets.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPONENTS

A. Basis of Design: Kinetex Flooring Modules 1. Product, color and pattern as indicated in drawings. 2. Backing: Polyester Cushion Felt 3. Dye Method: Solution Dyed 4. Fiber Type: Polyester 5. Total Weight (Nominal Average): 4.5 oz - 5.2 oz / square foot 6. Soil Release: Yes 7. Standard Size: 24 inch x 24 inch 8. Performance Testing:

a. Pill Test / DOC-FF-1-70 (ASTM D25-89) - Requirement Pass b. Flooring Radiant Panel / ASTM E-648, Class 1 c. Smoke Density: Less than 450 flaming (ASTM E662) d. Static Test: Less than 3kv (AATCC-134) e. Recycled Content: Minimum of 50 % recycled content f. NSF/ANSI 140 Platinum Certified g. Closed-loop recyclable.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Sub-Floor Filler: Type recommended by flooring material manufacturer for field conditions.

B. Moldings, Stair Nosings, Edge and Transition Strips: 1. Aluminum and Vinyl as selected by Architect.

C. Contact Adhesive: Recommended by carpet manufacturer, releasable type.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation examination.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation preparation.



B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler.

C. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.

D. Clean substrate.

3.3 SUBFLOORS

A. New Concrete - new concrete must be fully cured and free of moisture (see ASTM F710). Substrate surfaces must be tested for moisture emission per ASTM-F-2170-2 relative humidity probe. Acceptable relative humidity probe testing results are up to 95% RH. Alkalinity tests should also be performed per ASTM F 710. The maximum acceptable PH is 9.0

B. Existing Concrete - must be checked for moisture. Dry, dusty, porous floors must be primed or encapsulated with a sealer.

C. Existing VCT/VAT - Tiles must be well secured to the floor or removed. Broken, damaged or loose tiles must be replaced. Waxes and similar finishes must be removed from VCT before applying adhesive.

D. Existing Carpet - Remove old carpet and carpet adhesives by scraping or other mechanical means. Any remaining adhesive residues may be covered with a Portland based patching compound or encapsulated with a sealer.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Install carpet tile in accordance with CRI Carpet Installation Standard.

B. Do not mix carpet from different cartons unless from same dye lot.

C. Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps.

D. Install carpet tile in square pattern, with pile direction as indicated, set aligned as indicated on shop drawings.

E. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline.

F. Fully adhere carpet tile to substrate where wheeled traffic is anticipated - consult with Owner to confirm locations.

G. Provide ample adhesive to be used around the perimeter and tiles smaller than 3”.

H. Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions and tight to bases without coved toe.

I. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges.



3.5 CLEANING

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.

B. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.

C. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.

D. If construction caused carpet to become soiled or penetrated with dust, provide deep extracting cleaning prior to turn over to the Owner.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished Work.

B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface.

C. Cover carpeting in traffic areas with protective non-staining building paper. Do not use plastic sheeting.

END OF SECTION


Acoustical Wall Panels

09 77 16-1

SECTION 09 77 16

ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Fabric wrapped panels, flat. 2. Fabric for all acoustical panels and extra stock. 3. All mounting and installation accessories and hardware. 4. Coordination of removal, modification and reinstallation of thru-panel

mechanical and electrical items penetrating acoustical panels.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 20 00 - Price and Payment Procedures: Allowance for Acoustical

Testing and Acoustical Wall Panels. 2. Section 06 10 52 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C423 - Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound

Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method. 2. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board

Thermal Insulation. 3. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Acoustical Testing Results: 1. After the installation of the Acoustical Spray Insulation on the metal roof deck,

engage an approved company to conduct acoustical testing of the Gymnasium to determine the minimum number of acoustical wall panels to manage acoustics in the space for multi-use purpose including athletics, community functions and stage performances. a. Company to perform acoustical testing shall be pre-approved by the

Owner prior to completion of work. b. Basis of Design for Acoustical Testing - Acoustical Solutions; Contact

Matt Boughan; (804) 346-8350 c. Refer to Specification Allowances

C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate layout and dimensions of acoustical wall panels, frame profiles, core

materials, mounting method and fabric face direction and matching. 2. Indicate interface with adjacent materials.

D. Product Data: Submit data frame, core, fabric, and accessory materials.



09 77 16-2

E. Samples: Submit two samples of each component illustrating construction, profile and surface texture and finish. 1. Core Samples: Minimum 12 x 12 inch in size to illustrate core construction. 2. Fabric Samples: Minimum 12 x 12 inch in size to illustrate fabric pattern, color,

and texture. 3. Finished sample: One 12x12 inch in size to illustrate a finished panel including

mounting method.

F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: 1. Submit manufacturers written installation instructions. 2. Submit special procedures, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.

G. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products comply with specified requirements.



B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit fabric care and maintenance procedures, recommended fabric maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for fabric cleaning.


A. Surface Burning Characteristics: 1. Textile Wall Coverings: Comply with one of the following:

a. Maximum 25/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

b. Requirements of applicable code when tested in accordance with NFPA 265 Method B test protocol.

c. Requirements of applicable code when tested in accordance with NFPA 286.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS


B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience approved by manufacturer.



B. Accept materials on site in manufacturers original packaging. Inspect for damage.

C. Store materials in a horizontally, not on edge. Stack height shall not allow for damaging of material face or edge.

D. Store materials indoors with environmental conditions as specified for installation.

E. Acclimate materials to installation conditions for seventy-two hours prior to installation.



09 77 16-3

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.

B. Do not install acoustical wall treatment until space has been enclosed and is watertight, wet work is complete and dry and adjacent and related work is completed.

C. Do not install acoustical wall until ambient temperature and humidity level will be continuously maintained at conditions indicated for Owner occupancy.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for extra materials.

B. Supply 2 linear yards of full width fabric for each type, color, and pattern specified, with same dye lot as that installed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACOUSTIC PANELS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong “Soundsoak Acoustical Wall Panels”. 2. Decoustics “Acoustical Wall Panels”. 3. Lamvin, Inc. “Sonic Series Acoustical Panels”.

B. Panels: Composite medium density fiberglass core with fabric covering. 1. Fiberglass Board: ASTM C612; Category 1, semi-rigid, minimum 6 pcf density,

unfaced with chemically hardened edges. 2. Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Edge Profile: ½ chamfered and square edges as indicated. 4. Composite Panel Flame Spread: ASTM E84; Class A.

C. Fabric Covering: As follows: 1. Type: 100 percent woven polyester. 2. Width: 65-66”, no repeat, opaque. 3. Classification: Fire Retardant fabric, Class A. 4. Color: As selected from manufacturer’s full range. 5. Basis of Design: Guilford of Maine, “Anchorage” and “Drift” patterns. 6. Other acceptable fabrics of similar texture and colors:

a. Carnegie Fabrics. b. Arc Com Fabrics .

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Mounting System: Manufacturer’s standard z-clip system.

B. Fasteners: Type recommended by panel manufacturer to suit application.

C. Adhesive: Type recommended by panel manufacturer.



09 77 16-4

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate panels to sizes and configurations indicated.

B. Attach facing materials to cores to produce installed panels with visible surfaces fully covered and free from waves in fabric weave, wrinkles, sags, blisters, seams, adhesive or other foreign matter.

C. Fabricate back-mounted panels in factory to exact sizes required to fit wall surfaces based on field measurements of completed substrates indicated to receive acoustical wall panels.

D. Attach fabric to panels so that there are no seams or gathering of material on face.

E. All panels to have same profile and present monolithic appearance.

F. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Provide acoustical wall panel fabric as specified, all one dye lot, one direction.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify substrate is flat, plumb and level and ready to receive the work of this section.

C. Verify adjacent and related work is complete.

D. Verify blocking to receive panel attachments are installed and properly located.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Quantity of acoustical panels to be determined by acoustical testing and adjustment of specification Allowance as approved by the Owner.

B. Install panels plumb, level, in plane, and aligned. Intersecting corners to align.

C. Comply with panel manufacturer's printed instructions for installation of panels using type of mounting methods indicated.

D. Scribe acoustical wall panels to fit adjacent work. Butt joints tightly.



B. Maximum Variation From Indicated Position: 1/8 inch.

C. Maximum Offset From Indicated Alignment: 1/16 inch.



09 77 16-5

D. Maximum Out of Square: 1/8 inch difference in panel diagonals.

3.4 CLEANING


B. Clean exposed fabric faces.

END OF SECTION


Painting and Coating

09 90 00-1

SECTION 09 90 00

PAINTING AND COATING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes all materials, labor, tools, equipment and supervision necessary for surface preparation, priming, and complete field painting of all items indicated on the Drawings and herein specified. This Work shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. New exterior metals (except pre-finished items). 2. Exposed-to-view interior metals (except pre-finished items). 3. Various exposed-to-view conduits, ductwork, hangers, utility piping, electrical

boxes and panels and similar items. 4. Interior wall-mounted air diffusers and grilles. 5. Interior drywall, metal, masonry and wood surfaces which are not prefinished or

scheduled for other finishes.

B. Work Not Included, or Specified Elsewhere: 1. Shop Priming: Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items is

included under various sections for structural steel, miscellaneous metal, hollow metal work, and similar items.

2. Pre-Finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting when factory-finishing or installer-finishing is specified for such items as (but not limited to) metal toilet enclosures, prefinished partition systems, acoustic materials architectural woodwork and casework, finished mechanical and electrical equipment including light fixtures, switchgear and distribution cabinets, (except in finished areas).

3. Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces such as walls or ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas, foundation spaces, furred areas, utility tunnels, pipe spaces, duct shafts and elevator shafts.

4. Finished Metal Surfaces: Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze and similar finished materials will not require finish painting, unless otherwise indicated.

5. Operating Parts: Moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical parts, such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts will not require finish painting, unless otherwise indicated.

6. Painting of existing brick and cmu exterior masonry.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and

Related Products.



09 90 00-2

2. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood-Base Materials.

3. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

B. Painting and Decorating Contractors of America: 1. PDCA - Architectural Painting Specification Manual.

C. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings: 1. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Manual.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit data on finishing products. 1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate

each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.

2. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).

C. Samples: 1. Initial Submittal: Submit two sets of manufacturer’s paper chip samples,

illustrating range of colors and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled.

2. Final Submittal: Submit three painted samples, illustrating selected colors and textures for each color and system selected with specified coats cascaded. Submit on heavy cardstock, 8-1/2 x 11 inch in size.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special surface preparation procedures and substrate conditions requiring special attention.



B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces.


A. Surface Burning Characteristics:



09 90 00-3

1. Fire Retardant Finishes: Maximum 25/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS


B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 3 years experience approved by manufacturer.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.



B. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.

C. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.

D. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.



B. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside temperature ranges required by paint product manufacturer.

C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow when relative humidity is outside humidity ranges, or moisture content of surfaces exceed those required by paint product manufacturer.

D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.

E. Minimum Application Temperature for Stain Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.

F. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candle measured mid-height at substrate surface.



09 90 00-4


A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

B. Supply 1 gallon of each color, type, and surface texture; store where directed.

C. Label each container with color, type, texture and room locations in addition to manufacturer's label.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINTS AND COATINGS

A. Manufacturers: Paints, Stains, Primer Sealers and Block Fillers. 1. Benjamin Moore Paints. 2. International Protective Coatings (IPC) 3. PPG Architectural Coatings. 4. The Sherwin-Williams Company.

B. Provide the best quality grade of the various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by paint manufacturer approved by the Architect. Materials not displaying the manufacturer's identification as a best-grade product will not be acceptable.

C. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats and finish coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

D. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Prepare coatings: 1. To soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to

homogeneous coating. 2. For good flow and brushing properties. 3. Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

B. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve finishes specified; commercial quality.

C. Patching Materials: Latex filler.

D. Fastener Head Cover Materials: Latex filler.



09 90 00-5

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify surfaces are ready to receive Work as instructed by product manufacturer.

C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report conditions capable of affecting proper application. 1. The Applicator shall be wholly responsible for the finish of the work, and shall

not commence any part of it until surfaces are in proper condition.

D. Test shop applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.

E. Measure moisture content of surfaces using electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. 3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. 4. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. 5. Concrete Floors: 8 percent.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Appurtenances: Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.

B. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces capable of affecting work of this section.

C. Marks: Seal with shellac those which may bleed through surface finishes.

D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.

E. Aluminum Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching primer immediately following cleaning.

F. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove foreign particles to permit adhesion of finishing products. Apply compatible sealer or primer.

G. Insulated Coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton.

H. Concrete Floors: Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse floors with clear water. Verify required acid-alkali balance is achieved. Allow to dry.

I. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair.



09 90 00-6

J. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer.

K. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.

L. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand or power tool wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs.

M. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Prime metal items including shop primed items.

N. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats.

O. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried; sand lightly between coats. 1. Prepare substrate in accordance with finish manufacturer’s recommendations.

P. Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied.

B. The number of coats specified in the Schedules are minimum requirements. Additional coats shall be applied until a uniform surface is achieved. 1. Apply coats at coverage rates to achieve the manufacturer’s recommended dry

film thickness, minimum. 2. Use tinted primer for medium and deep base colors.

C. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless specified otherwise.

D. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.

E. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat.



09 90 00-7

F. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into grain before set. Wipe excess from surface.

G. Prime concealed surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork and siding with primer paint.

H. Prime concealed surfaces of interior wood surfaces scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with thinner.

I. Finishing Mechanical And Electrical Equipment: 1. Paint shop finished items occurring at interior areas. 2. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and

electrical components and paint separately. 3. Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and

exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, and similar items except where items are shop finished.

4. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, to match face panels.

5. Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas. 6. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone

equipment before installing equipment. 7. Color code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed duct work in accordance

with requirements indicated. Color band and identify with flow arrows, names, and numbering.

8. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing.

3.4 CLEANING


B. Collect waste material that may constitute fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage by painting and finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting as acceptable to Architect.

D. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly-painted finishes. Remove protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations.

E. At the completion of work of other trades, touch-up paint and restore all damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.5 SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR SURFACES

A. Steel / Unprimed: 1. One coat of acrylic waterborne, corrosion resistant, industrial primer coating.



09 90 00-8

2. Two coats of acrylic waterborne, corrosion resistant, industrial coating, semi-gloss.

B. Steel / Shop Primed: 1. One coat of acrylic waterborne, corrosion resistant, industrial primer coating. 2. Two coats of acrylic waterborne, corrosion resistant, industrial coating, semi-

gloss.

C. Steel / Galvanized: 1. One coat of acrylic waterborne, corrosion resistant, industrial primer coating. 2. Two coats of acrylic waterborne, corrosion resistant, industrial coating, semi-

gloss.

D. Aluminum / Mill Finish: 1. One coat of acrylic waterborne, corrosion resistant, industrial primer coating. 2. Two coats of acrylic waterborne, corrosion resistant, industrial coating, semi-

gloss.

3.6 SCHEDULE - INTERIOR SURFACES

A. Wood - Painted: 1. One coat of latex acrylic primer sealer. 2. Two coats of latex acrylic, semi-gloss.

B. New Concrete Block - General: 1. One coat of block filler. 2. Two coats of latex acrylic, eggshell, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Existing Concrete Block - General: 1. One coat of primer, suitable for covering type of existing paint. 2. Two coats of latex acrylic, eggshell, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Steel - Unprimed: 1. One coat of latex acrylic metal primer. 2. Two coats of acrylic-modified alkyd industrial enamel, semi-gloss.

E. Steel - Primed: 1. One coat of latex acrylic metal primer. 2. Two coats of acrylic-modified alkyd industrial enamel, semi-gloss.

F. Steel - Galvanized: 1. One coat of latex acrylic metal primer. 2. Two coats of acrylic-modified alkyd industrial enamel, semi-gloss.

G. Aluminum - Mill Finish: 1. One coat of latex acrylic metal primer. 2. Two coats of acrylic-modified alkyd industrial enamel, semi-gloss.

H. Gypsum Board Walls - General Spaces:



09 90 00-9

1. One coat of latex acrylic primer sealer. 2. Two coats of latex acrylic, eggshell.

I. Gypsum Board Ceilings: 1. One coat of latex acrylic primer sealer. 2. Two coats of latex acrylic, flat.

J. Exposed Structure, Ductwork, Piping, Conduits and Similar Items: 1. Two coats of spray-applied, dry-fog type, latex acrylic, flat.

END OF SECTION


Plastic Toilet Compartments 10 21 15 - 1

SECTION 10 21 15

PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Solid plastic toilet compartments. 2. Vestibule screen.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 10 28 00 - Toilet Accessories: Execution requirements for accessories specified

in this Section.


A. ASTM International: 1. A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel

Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 2. B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 3. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Work of this Section with placement of support framing and anchors.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions and details.

D. Samples: Submit one sample illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen.

E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.

1.5 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. Indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS

A. Manufacturer List: 1. Bradley Corporation 2. Scranton Products (Hiny Hiders) 3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements

B. Compartments and Screens: Floor mounted overhead braced, wall mounted.

C. Door and Panel Dimensions: 1. Thickness: 1 inch 2. Door Width: 24 inch 3. Accessible Door Width: 36 inch, out-swinging; 36 inch in-swinging. 4. Height: 55 inch

D. Pilaster Dimensions: 1. Thickness: 1 inch 2. Width as required to suit compartment width and spacing.

E. Vestibule Screen: 1. Wall mounted with two full-length continuous panel brackets with end pilaster anchored

to floor. 2. Width: 28 inch 3. Height: 42 inch

F. Toilet Compartments: Solid, plastic panels, doors, and pilasters, floor mounted head-rail braced. 1. Color: As selected from manufacturers full range of a minimum of 20 colors and

textures.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Pilaster Shoe: 1. Formed ASTM A666 Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish, 3 inch high, concealing

floor and ceiling fastenings. Provide adjustment for floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with pilaster.

B. Head Rails: Hollow anodized aluminum tube, 1 x 1-5/8 inch size, with anti-grip profiles and cast socket wall brackets.

C. Brackets: Full length, continuous double-sided panel brackets; anodized aluminum.

D. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel, tamper-proof type. 1. For attaching panels and pilasters to brackets: Through-bolts and nuts; tamper proof.

E. Hardware: Stainless steel.



1. Hinges: Heavy duty stainless steel, through bolted, with gravity cams, adjustable to hold door open at any angle up to 90 degrees, with emergency access by lifting door..

2. Thumbturn door latch with exterior emergency access feature. 3. Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; mounted on pilaster in alignment with door

latch. 4. Coat hook with rubber bumper; one for each compartment, mounted on door. 5. Door pull for out-swinging doors. 6. Furnish metal heat sink at bottom of doors and partitions.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for installation examination.

B. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings.

C. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures.

D. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Maintain 3/8 to 1/2 inch space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters.

B. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices.

C. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head-rail joints at pilaster center lines.

D. Field touch-up of scratches or damaged finish will not be permitted. Replace damaged or scratched materials with new materials.

3.3 TOLERANCES

A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for tolerances.

B. Maximum Variation from Indicated Position: 1/4 inch.

C. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/8 inch.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for starting and adjusting.

B. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch.



C. Adjust hinges to position doors in partially open position when unlatched. Return out-swinging doors to closed position.

D. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane.

3.5 CLEANING


B. Clean partition and screen surfaces with materials and cleansers according to manufacturer's recommendations.

END OF SECTION


Toilet Accessories 10 28 00-1

SECTION 10 28 00

TOILET ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes toilet accessories as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: OFCI: paper towel dispensers, toilet paper

dispensers, trash cans. 2. Section 10 21 15 - Plastic Toilet Compartments

1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. B. ASTM A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General

Service. C. ASTM A653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated

(Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. D. ASTM A666 - Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. E. ASTM B456 - Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and

Nickel Plus Chromium. F. ASTM C1036 - Flat Glass.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods.


A. Perform Work in accordance with requirements for physically handicapped.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the Work with placement of internal wall reinforcement and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

A. Manufacturers:



1. Bobrick Washroom Accessories. 2. Bradley Corporation. 3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 1. Grind welded joints smooth. 2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces.

B. Keys: Furnish three keys for each accessory to Owner; master key accessories.

C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304.

D. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, stainless steel.

E. Galvanized Sheet Steel: ASTM A653, G90 zinc coating.

F. Mirror Glass: Float glass, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2 (ASTM C 1036), with silvering, copper coating, and suitable protective organic coating to copper backing in accordance with FS DD-M-411.

G. Adhesive: Two-component epoxy type, waterproof.

H. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized , tamper-proof.

I. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate.

2.3 FACTORY FINISHING

A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted.

B. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B456, Type SC 2, satin finish, unless otherwise noted.

C. Galvanizing for Items other than Sheet: ASTM A123 to 1.25 oz/sq yd. Galvanize ferrous metal and fastening devices.

D. Back-paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.

2.4 BABY CHANGING STATIONS

A. Wall-Mounted Horizontal Units: High-impact molded polyethylene construction to withstand static load of 400 pounds; steel hinges and mounting supports with hidden pneumatic opener/closer; child protection strap, sanitary bed liner dispenser and signage.



1. Product Quality Standard: '961 Series' as manufactured by Bradley Corporation, or approved equivalent; gray in color.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Coordinate project conditions and Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed items.

B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.

C. Verify field measurements are as indicated on product data.

D. Verify proper installation of blocking, reinforcing plates, concealed anchors and other supports in walls and ceilings.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation.

B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.

B. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations and as indicated on Drawings.

3.4 SCHEDULES 1. Provide products as indicated in the Toilet Accessory Schedule included in the

Drawings.

END OF SECTION


Fire Protection Specialties 10 44 00-1

SECTION 10 44 00

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes fire extinguishers; fire extinguisher cabinets; and brackets for wall

mounting.


1. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry

2. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 10 (National Fire Protection Association) - Standard for Portable Fire

Extinguishers.

B. UL (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory.


A. Conform to NFPA 10.

B. Provide extinguishers classified and labeled by testing firm acceptable to authority

having jurisdiction for purpose specified and indicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions, rough-in measurements for

recessed cabinets, wall bracket mounted measurements, fire ratings and locations.

C. Product Data: Submit extinguisher operational features, color and finish, anchorage

details.



B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit test, refill or recharge schedules and re-

certification requirements.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section

with minimum three years' documented experience.




A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling,

storing and protecting products.

B. Inspection: Accept materials on Site and inspect for damage.

C. Store and protect materials according to manufacturer's instructions.


A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products

on site.

B. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature is capable of freezing extinguisher

ingredients.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for warranties.

B. Furnish five-year manufacturer's warranty for fire extinguishers and fire extinguisher

cabinets.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Dry Chemical Type: Cast steel tank, with pressure gage; Class B:C, Size 5 lb.

B. Extinguisher Finish: Steel, enamel to color as selected.

C. Wall bracket mounts where cabinets are not indicated.

2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

A. Non-Fire-Rated Cabinets:

1. Configuration: Surface mounted and semi-recessed types, sized to accommodate

extinguisher.

2. Trim Type:

a. Surface Mounted Cabinets

b. Semi-recessed Cabinets

3. Metal: Formed sheet steel, primed galvanized; 0.036 inch thick minimum base

metal.

4. Door: 0.016 inch thick, reinforced for flatness and rigidity; latch with break glass

access.

5. Door Glazing: Glass, clear, 1/8 inch thick tempered.

6. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet.

7. Form cabinet enclosure with right angle inside corners and seams. Form

perimeter trim and door stiles.

8. Pre-drill for anchors.



9. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with continuous piano hinge. Furnish

manufacturer’s standard catch.

10. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth.

11. Glaze doors with resilient channel gasket glazing.

12. Finishing Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Baked enamel, color as selected.

13. Finishing Cabinet Interior: Baked enamel, color as selected.

B. Product Quality Standard: Larsen's Manufacturing Company "Architectural Series FS-

2409-R3," or approved equivalent.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Graphic Identification: Identify cabinets with door-mounted signage reading “FIRE

EXTINGUISHER”.

B. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Manufacturer's standard appropriate to cabinet and

substrate.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Drawings for locations.

B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings.

C. Install cabinets maximum 48 inches from finished floor to top of extinguisher handle.

D. Secure rigidly in place.

E. Place extinguishers in cabinets.

F. Position cabinet signage as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

END OF SECTION


Athletic Equipment 11 50 00-1

SECTION 11 50 00

ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes miscellaneous athletic equipment and attachment accessories as indicated on the Drawings and herein specified.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 11 04 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Grounds and support framing. 2. Section 09 65 66 - Sheet Vinyl Resilient Athletic Flooring : Resilient flooring to

receive recessed floor sleeves for volleyball stantions. 3. Section 09 64 02 - Wood Athletic Flooring: Wood flooring to receive recessed

floor sleeves for volleyball stantions.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Civil Engineers: 1. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials. 2. ASTM F 2440 – Standard Specification for Indoor Wall/Feature Padding.

C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.

D. National Electric Code.

E. National Federation of State High School Associations: 1. NFHS - Basketball Rules Book.

F. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 286 – Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Contribution of Wall

and Ceiling Interior Finish to Room Fire Growth.

G. Standard for CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 207-M89 for indoor use.

H. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL - Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory. 2. UL 48 - Standard for Electric Signs. 3. UL 214 - Test for Flame-Propagation of Fabrics and Films. 4. UL 1433 - Standard for Control Centers for Changing Message Type Signs.

1.3 SUBMITTALS




B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate size and location of volleyball nets, stantion details, accessory anchoring

members. 2. Indicate net location in relation to court.

C. Product Data for each type of equipment specified and utility requirements.

D. Samples for color selections showing the manufacturer’s full range of materials, colors, textures and patterns available.

E. Operating and Maintenance Data for each item of equipment.




B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include the following. 1. Parts catalog with complete list of replacement parts. 2. Schematic wiring diagrams of installed electrical equipment.


A. Products and installations shall comply with applicable referenced codes.

B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL or another testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS


B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum years documented experience approved by manufacturer.

C. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide athletic equipment of each type from one source of a single manufacturer, compatible with adjacent materials.



B. Accept equipment on site in manufacturer's original packaging. Inspect for damage.

C. Store equipment indoors, protected from weather and contamination until installed.





B. Field measure height of existing stage platform prior to fabrication of stage protection pads.

1.9 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate the Work with installation of associated and adjacent components.

C. Coordinate the Work with placement of internal wall reinforcement to receive anchor attachments.

1.10 WARRANTY


B. Furnish lifetime manufacturer warranty for basketball backstop and backboard components.

C. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for basketball goal components.

D. Furnish ten year manufacturer warranty for volleyball systems and components.

E. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for scoreboard components. 1. Warranty shall include labor for the first 90 days.

1.11 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for maintenance materials.


A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for extra materials.

B. Furnish two of each type basketball net.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT

A. Manufacturers: 1. Basketball Goals, Volleyball Equipment, Wall Protection Pads:

a. Porter Athletic Equipment Company, or approved equivalent. 2. Scoreboards:

a. Daktronics, or approved equivalent. 3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect from the manufacturers standard color ranges for each applicable product, unless otherwise noted.



2.2 PORTABLE BASKETBALL GOALS

A. Provide two (4) height-adjustable portable basketball goal assemblies as follows: 1. Backstops: Height adjustable portable backstop; ‘000735208 Series’ as

manufactured by Porter Athletic Equipment Company, or approved equivalent. a. Color: White

2. Backboards: Glass backboard 72 x 42 x 1/2 inch, with padding; 'No. 208 with No 326 Pro Pad', as manufactured by Porter Athletic Equipment Company, or approved equivalent. a. Pad Color: as selected per manufacturer's full range of color options.

3. Goals: Flexible type with nets; 'No. 00256500,' as manufactured by Porter Athletic Equipment Company, or approved equivalent.

4. Protection Pads (Fire Retardant) : Portable backstop padding with vinyl covering, fire retardant treated as follows: a. Fabric Covering: 15-ounce, fire retardant, vinyl -coated polyester; colors

as selected from manufacturer's full range. 1) Covering shall be mildew resistant and rot resistance, with

infection-combating fungicide. b. Foam: 2 inch thick, flame retardant, polycholorprene latex foam meeting

requirements of NFPA 286. c. Maximum flame spread/smoke development rating of 25/450 in

accordance with ASTM E84.

2.3 VOLLEYBALL EQUIPMENT

A. Provide two (2) volleyball systems complete with standards, nets, net antennas, cables, winch, standard pads and judge’s stands with pads as required for complete installation as follows: 1. Standards: 3-1/2-inch O.D., high-strength, lightweight, aluminum alloy 6063-T6,

with internal, dual channel to allow for infinite net height adjustments for volleyball, badminton and tennis.

2. Pads: As selected from manufacturer’s full range of colors. 3. Volleyball System: ‘Powr-Rib II System No. 1971’ as manufactured by Porter

Athletic Equipment Company, or approved equivalent.

B. Floor Sleeves: Steel tube sleeves with anchor bar and brass cover plates; specially designed for floating synthetic floors; ‘No. 872-100’, as manufactured by Porter Athletic Equipment Company, or approved equivalent. 1. Provide four (4) pairs of sleeves as indicated on Drawings.

C. Volleyball Transport System: Heavy duty wheeled frame capable of storing three full volleyball systems and one judge's stand. 'Volleyball Storage/Transport System No. 00956-100' as manufactured by Porter Athletic Equipment Company, or approved equivalent.

2.4 WALL PROTECTION PADS

A. Wall Protection Pads (Fire Retardant): Wall mounted pads with vinyl covering, fire retardant treated, as follows: 1. Size: 24 x 72 x 2 inch panels with manufacturer’s standard z-clip wall

attachment.



2. Materials: a. Fabric Covering: 15-ounce, fire-retardant, high-tensile, vinyl-coated

polyester; colors as selected from manufacturer’s full range. 1) Covering shall be mildew resistant and rot resistant, with

infection-combating fungicide. b. Foam: 2-inch thick, flame-retardant, polychloroprene latex foam

meeting requirements of NFPA 286. c. Backing: Manufacturer’s standard fire-retardant rigid board.

3. Provide fire retardant molded inserts as required for access to wall mounted receptacles. Provide finished cutouts for other wall-mounted equipment.

4. Shock Absorption: Comply with ASTM F 2440. 5. Maximum flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/450 in accordance with

ASTM E84. 6. Acceptable Product: ‘FR-SAFPAD No. 570-1XX’, as manufactured by Porter

Athletic Equipment Company, or approved equivalent.

B. Stage Protection Pads (Fire Retardant): Wall mounted pads with vinyl covering, fire retardant treated, as follows: 1. Size: 24 x 37 x 2 inch panels with manufacturer's standard z-clip wall attachment. 2. Materials:

a. Fabric Covering: 15-ounce, fire-retardant, high-tensile, vinyl-coated polyester; colors as selected from manufacturer’s full range. 1) Covering shall be mildew resistant and rot resistant, with

infection-combating fungicide. b. Foam: 2-inch thick, flame-retardant, polychloroprene latex foam

meeting requirements of NFPA 286. c. Backing: Manufacturer’s standard fire-retardant rigid board.

3. Provide fire retardant molded inserts as required for access to wall mounted receptacles. Provide finished cutouts for other wall-mounted equipment.

4. Shock Absorption: Comply with ASTM F 2440. 5. Maximum flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/450 in accordance with

ASTM E84. 6. Acceptable Product: ‘Fire Safe Stage Pad No. 96057500’, as manufactured by

Porter Athletic Equipment Company, or approved equivalent. a. Provide 'Stor-Strip, No. 0014440' to secure pad to top of stage.

2.5 SCOREBOARDS

A. Basketball Scoreboard: Single-sided wall-mounted scoreboard capable of scoring basketball and volleyball. 1. Display: HOME and GUEST to 199; PERIOD to 9; FOULS to 99; PLAYER

(player number) to 99; player FOUL to 9; T.O.L (Time Outs Left) to 9; indicates possession and bonus; displays period time to 59:59 and during the last minute of the period, it displays time to 1/10 of a second.

2. Nominal Size: 6'-0" high, 8'-0" wide, 0'-6" deep. 3. Construction: All-aluminum cabinet capable of withstanding high-velocity

impact from indoor sports balls without the need for protective screens. a. Color: As selected from manufacturer’s range of 150 minimum colors.

4. Digits: Colored LED with seven bar segments per digit as follows: a. Colors:



1) Clock, PLAYER, FOUL, PERIOD and T.O.L. digits and bonus indicators: Amber.

2) All Other Digits: Red. b. Sizes:

1) Clock and score digits: 10" high. 2) All Other Digits: 7" high.

5. Captions: White vinyl lettering applied directly to scoreboard face as follows: a. HOME and GUEST captions: 6" high. b. PERIOD caption: 4" high. c. All other captions: 3" high.

6. Horn: Vibrating horn mounted behind scoreboard face that sounds automatically when period clock counts down to zero or manually as directed by operator.

7. Controls: Operation by manufacturer’s standard wireless interface. 8. Acceptable Product: ‘BB-2153’, as manufactured by Daktronics, or approved

equivalent.

B. Control Console: Aluminum console housing electronics and water-resistant keyboard; compatible with specified scoreboards. 1. Scoring: Basketball, and volleyball 2. Practice Timer Mode: As follows:

a. Sound the horn at the end of each segment. b. 99 programmable segments. c. Displays segment number and segment length. d. Programmable interval time.

3. Console shall recall clock, score, and period information if power is lost. 4. Wireless Interface: 2.4 GHz spread spectrum radio for scoreboard control. 5. Provide with carrying case and battery pack. 6. Acceptable Product: ‘All-Sport 5000’, as manufactured by Daktronics, or

approved equivalent.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Accessories: Provide all accessories required for a complete installation.

B. Electrically Operated Equipment: Provide all motors, transformers, wiring, conduit, controls and related items for a complete and operational installation.

C. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome-plated steel or brass. For concealed fasteners, use hot-dip galvanized or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel. 1. Provide secure attachment, concealed where possible.

D. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices for installing equipment where set in concrete or built into masonry. Coordinate delivery of inserts and anchoring devices with other work to avoid delaying installation.

E. Anchorage Concrete: Non-shrink grout or hydraulic cement as recommended by device to be anchored in floor slab.



2.7 FABRICATION

A. Provide fittings and hardware to accommodate site assembly and installation.

B. Supply components required for anchorage. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise.

C. When necessary to cut and fit on site, fabricate materials with ample allowance for cutting. Furnish trim for scribing and site cutting.

D. Verify locations of cutouts for wall-mounted equipment from on-site measurements prior to fabrication.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION

A. Provide floor sleeves to General Contractor at proper time to allow core drill into existing concrete slab and vinyl composition tile. Top of sleeve shall be installed slightly below finished floor elevation.

B. Provide location, loading and anchorage information necessary for installation of blocking for support of equipment.

3.2 EXAMINATION


B. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.

C. Verify items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work.

D. Verify that critical dimensions are correct and that conditions are acceptable. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

E. Verify electrical power is available and of correct characteristics.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install all equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and NFHS requirements.

B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.

C. Coordinate with utility connections.

D. As far as possible, conceal fastenings; where not possible, locate then in inconspicuous places.

E. Test electrically-operated units to verify controls and switches and other operating components are in optimum functioning conditions.



F. Set up all equipment in final positions, ready for use.

G. Touch up damaged finishes to match shop finish.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for balancing and adjusting.

B. Adjust installed operable units for smooth and proper operation over full range of movement.

C. Adjust limit switches to prevent damage to equipment.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.

B. Remove protective coverings from finished surfaces. Clean surfaces and components ready for inspection.

C. Touch up damaged shop-applied finishes as required to restore damaged areas.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for demonstration and training.

B. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper operation and maintenance.

C. Demonstrate electrically operated units to Owner.

END OF SECTION


Telescoping Stands 12 76 00-1

SECTION 12 76 00

TELESCOPING STANDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wall-attached telescoping stands.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing. 2. Section 09 65 66 - Sheet vinyl resilient athletic flooring.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Telescoping stands are operable systems of multiple-tiered benches on interconnected, folding platforms that close, without being dismantled, into a nested vertical stack for storing in minimum floor area when not in use.


A. Structural Performance Characteristics: Engineer, fabricate, and install telescoping stands to withstand the design loads specified in NFPA 102, "Standard for Assembly Seating, Tents, and Membrane Structures," Chapter 5, "Folding and Telescopic Seating," without exceeding the allowable design working stresses of the materials involved, including anchors and connections. Apply each load to produce the maximum stress in each respective component of each telescoping stand unit.

B. Telescopic seating shall be designed to support, in addition to its own weight, and the weight of added accessories, a uniform distributed live load of not less than 100 lbs. per sq. ft. of gross horizontal projection. Seat boards and footrest shall be designed for a live load of not less than 120 lbs. per linear foot.

C. Sway force applied to seats shall be 24 lbs. per linear foot parallel to the seats and 10 lbs. per linear foot perpendicular to seats. Sway forces shall not be considered simultaneously applied.

D. Railings, posts and sockets designed to withstand the following forces applied separately. 1. Handrails shall be designed and constructed for:

a. A concentrated load of 200 lbs. applied at any point and in any direction. b. A uniform load of 50 lbs. per foot applied in any direction.

2. Guards shall be designed and constructed for: a. A concentrated load of 200 lbs applied at any point and in any direction

along the top railing member and b. A uniform load of 50 lbs per foot applied horizontally at the required

guardrail height and c. A simultaneous uniform load of 100 lbs. per foot applied vertically

downward at the top of the guardrail.



1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data for each type of telescoping stand specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.

C. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of telescoping stands including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work.

D. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each exposed material involving color selection.

E. Samples for verification of the following items, in the size indicated below. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used for the Work. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. 1. Molded-Plastic Benches: One end cap in each color indicated.

F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

G. Maintenance data for telescoping stands, including detailed instructions for operation and annual inspection requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1.


A. NFPA Standard: Comply with requirements of NFPA 102, "Standard for Assembly Seating, Tents, and Membrane Structures," Chapter 5, "Folding and Telescopic Seating," except where more stringent requirements are indicated or imposed by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. International Building Code Standard: Comply with requirements of IBC/ICC 300, Chapter 4 "Standard for Bleachers, Folding and Telescopic Seating and Grandstands Assembly Seating."

C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer to perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing types of telescoping stands similar to those required for this Project and who is acceptable to, or certified by, manufacturer of telescoping stands.

D. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally authorized to practice in the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of telescoping stands that are similar to that indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.



E. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code--Steel" and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." 1. Engage certified welders that have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests

for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, have undergone recertification.

F. Engineering Responsibility: Engineer telescoping stands by qualified professional engineer legally authorized to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Check actual dimensions of construction affecting telescoping stands by accurate field measurements before fabrication and show recorded measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. The manufacturer shall warrant all work performed under these specifications to be free of defects for a period of one year.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Irwin Telescopic Seating Company. (Basis of Design) 2. Interkal Inc. 3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Telescopic seating system shall be multiple tiered seating rows comprised of seat and deck components, risers and supportive understructure.

B. Seating Area: 2 sets: 3 Groups, 25 Feet 2 Inches Long, 4 Rows High, Wall attached, Movable, Manually Operated.

C. Decking: Panelam decking shall have a 0.030 (30 thousandths) high density polyethylene overlay, permanently bonded to structural western fir plywood in strict compliance with US Product Standard PS 195. Finish thickness to be 5/8”. Polyethylene finish to be textured grey or beige. Plywood shall be supported along the front and back edge for maximum rigidity. An “H” type aluminum splice beam shall be provided between all decks. Plywood with clear painted finish is unacceptable. Decking shall be through bolted to steel supports with locking hardware. Decking attached by use of self-tapping fasteners or retained by friction only is unacceptable.



D. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M), except where higher strength steel is indicated or standard with manufacturer.

E. Commercial-Quality Uncoated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366 (ASTM A 366M) cold-rolled steel sheet, or ASTM A 569 (ASTM A 569M) hot-rolled steel sheet, stretcher leveled.

F. Structural-Quality Uncoated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 570 (ASTM A 570M) hot-rolled steel sheet, or ASTM A 611 cold-rolled steel sheet, stretcher leveled.

G. High-Strength Uncoated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 607 hot- or cold-rolled steel sheet, stretcher leveled.

H. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G60 (ASTM A 653M, Z180) coating designation, phosphatized, stretcher leveled.

I. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold formed; or ASTM A 501, hot formed.

J. Polyethylene Plastic: ASTM D 1248, Type III, Class B; molded, color-pigmented, textured, impact-resistant, structural formulation.

K. Fasteners: Vibration proof, of size and material standard with manufacturer.

2.3 COMPONENTS

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard wall attached, manually operated telescoping stands fabricated to comply with requirements indicated. Smoothly round corners, edges, and exposed fasteners to eliminate snagging and pinching hazards. Form exposed sheet metal with flat, flush surfaces, true to line and level, and without cracking and grain separation. Perform welding by operators and processes complying with AWS requirements.

B. End Rails: End rails of the self-storing type, finished with textured epoxy powder-coated black enamel, shall be provided at the open ends of the group. End rails shall start at row three and meet all national building codes. Railing with flexible uprights that can be expanded beyond the 4" sphere are not acceptable.

C. End panels of plywood and supports shall be provided to enclose the open ends of the group in the closed position. End panels shall enclose the space between the wall and the back of the self-storing end rails. Finish to match deck panels.

D. Vinyl end curtain closures: Vinyl end curtains shall be provided to limit unauthorized access to the underside of the telescopic unit in the open position, and constructed of a sturdy vinyl material with sewn-in grommets for attachment. Color to be selected from manufacturer's standard selection.

E. Scorer's table shall be 8' x 15" wide of wood grain high pressure laminate. Scorer's table shall be relocatable to any row of any section without the use of mounting sockets. 1. Provide one Scorer's table.

F. Seat level rear filler panels used to close openings between top row seat and wall. Closure panel to match panelam deck surface.



G. Bench Seats and Skirts: Provide seats with uniform heights of not less than 16 inches or more than 18 inches, as standard with manufacturer. 1. Material: Polyethylene plastic in color selected by Architect from manufacturer's

full range of colors. 2. Profile: Contoured seat surface. 3. Depth: 10 inches. 4. Nosing: One piece, formed, 14-gauge steel with minimum G-60 pre-galvanized

finish.

H. Risers: Fabricate risers from steel sheet with painted or galvanized finish, as standard with manufacturer.

I. Footrests: Fabricate fully closed footrests from plywood, as standard with manufacturer.

J. Understructure: Fabricate understructure from structural steel members of size, spacing, and form required to support design loads. 1. Cantilever bench seat supports to produce toe space uninterrupted by vertical

bracing.

K. Continuous Wheel Channel: Wheel channels shall consist of a one piece formed steel channel welded to the base of a vertical column. Wheel channels accommodate 8 – 12 wheels per row for maximum weight distribution and operating ease. The number of wheels increase as the number of rows increase.

L. Wheels: 4" diameter with 1” non-marring soft rubber face with rounded edges designed to protect wood floor. Provide ½” diameter axle for all wheels.

M. Columns: Electrically welded closed rectangle steel tube, 1 1/2” x 3” minimum size, 11 gauge steel fitted with a rear welded gusset at the wheel channel.

N. Diagonal Braces: Structural formed steel truss fitted to row 4 and beyond. Bracing shall be attached to the rear riser at optimum locations to insure structural integrity. Bracing will be designed and shaped to support a minimum load of 1000 lbs of both compression and tension forces created when the bleacher is loaded.

O. Aisles: Fabricate stands with the following aisle configuration, at locations and of widths indicated on drawings: 1. Footrest-Level Configuration: Interrupt seats to provide aisle walking surfaces at

footrest level. Provide non-slip treads at front edge. 2. Intermediate aisle steps shall be provided. Steps are permanently attached closed

design. Steps shall be constructed from 14 ga steel, finished in Black powder coated epoxy and designed to eliminate any possible toe catch between the top of the intermediate step and the bottom of the nose beam per ADA or other applicable codes. Front step shall be removable and interlock the front row.

P. Aisle handrails: shall quickly and easily rotate 90 degrees to the locked position and store parallel to the front of the aisle. Railings that require removal from the pocket aor the use of tools for storage will not be acceptable. 1. Railing to be constructed of 1 1/2", 11 ga round steel tubing, finished in a

textured powder coat epoxy. 2. Provide full return of handrail.



Q. Wheel Chair Seating Areas: Permanent wheel chair spaces shall be provided at the section joint location or section length as shown on plans. Permanent notches to have Panelam closure panel to eliminate any open areas under the system. Closure panels to support row two.

R. Row Spacing: Fabricate units with row spacing of 24 inches at bleacher type seats, unless otherwise indicated.

S. Row Rise: Fabricate units with 12 inches, as standard with manufacturer.

T. Operation: Manual: Individual sections containing a series of tiered row shall be manually opened and closed. Each tiered row shall have mechanical locks to keep row fully extended when in the open position. Row locks shall automatically release upon operation of release level in the front skirt panel. Hinging of the lower skirt board is not acceptable.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Examine areas where telescoping stands are to be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of telescoping stands. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install telescoping stands to comply with manufacturer's instructions and Shop Drawings. Provide accessories indicated and anchors, fasteners, inserts, and other items required for installing and attaching units to adjoining construction.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing; final cleaning.

B. On completion of installation, including work of other trades, lubricate, test, and adjust each telescoping stand unit to operate easily and to comply with manufacturer's specifications.

C. Clean installed telescoping stands on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to demonstrate and train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below. 1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

controls and equipment.



2. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to operation, troubleshooting, servicing, inspection, and maintenance.

3. Review data in the operation and maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout."

4. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least 7 days' advance notice.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure telescoping stands are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION


Wheelchair Lifts 14 42 00 - 1

SECTION 14 42 00

WHEELCHAIR LIFTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Electrically operated, vertical wheelchair lifts. 2. Related accessories.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators. 2. ASME A17.2.3 - Inspector's Manual for Escalators and Moving Walks. 3. ASME A18.1 - Safety Standard for Platform Lifts and Stairway Chairlifts.

B. American Welding Society: 1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.

C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.


A. Conform to ASME A17.1 and applicable code for manufacture and installation of vertical wheelchair lift system.

B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for purpose specified and indicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate drive mechanism, lift construction, dimensions, control functions and operational description.

C. Product Data: Submit data on signal and operating fixtures, lift design, layout, components, and schematic of wiring diagrams.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit detailed installation instructions.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.





B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit parts catalog with complete list of equipment replacement parts; identify each entry

with equipment description and identifying code. 2. Submit technical information for servicing operating equipment.


A. Perform Work in accordance with ASME A17.1, and AWS D1.1.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three years experience and approved by manufacturer.



B. Accept wheelchair lifts on site in manufacturer’s protective containers. Inspect for damage.

C. Protect wheelchair lifts from damage before, during and after installation.



1.10 COORDINATION

A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination.

B. Coordinate installation with existing concrete slab, lift travel distance with finish floor elevations on drawings, and electric service power characteristics and location, grounding connections.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for warranties.

B. Furnish two year manufacturer’s warranty on drive train components.


A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for maintenance service.



B. Furnish service and maintenance of wheelchair lifts for one year from Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WHEELCHAIR LIFTS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Freedom Lift Systems 2. Symmetry Elevating Solutions 3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Basis of Design: Freedom Lift Systems - APFLC400.

B. Characteristics of lift as follows: 1. Load Capacity: 750 lbs. 2. Speed: 10 ft/min. 3. Travel Distance: 53" lifting height maximum 4. No. of Stops: 2 5. Nominal Platform Size: 36” x 54”, straight-through platform. 6. Gate Type: Single, swing interlocking type, 42 inches high 7. Location: Indoor 8. Standard Features: Manufacturer’s standard control system, construction materials and

finishes.

C. Provide the following operational and construction features: 1. 180 degree exits. 2. Automatic folding ramp.

2.3 SAFETY DEVICES

A. Upper and lower limit switches to prevent lift form over traveling.

B. Brake: Electro-mechanical type applied automatically by restrained compression spring to hold lift in position, and released electrically.

C. Electrical System: Grounded type.

D. Access Ramp and Guard Rail: Automatic type.

E. Platform Surfaces: Slip resistant.

F. Key-lock on controls meeting requirements of ANSI A17.1, Part 2000.

G. Top and bottom landing gates: Locking type provided with combination mechanical lock and electrical contact meeting ASTM A17.1, Section 2000.



H. Manual lowering crank.

2.4 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS

A. Wiring: Wheelchair lift factory wired by manufacturer with exterior grade thermo-plastic coated wiring in accordance with National Electric Code.

B. Electrical Characteristics: 1. 1/2 HP 24 volt DC Motor. 2. Coordinate the power supply options of 120 vac, 15 amp grounded circuit with the

manufacturer and the service indicated of the drawings.

C. Motor: NEMA MG1, instant reversing.

D. Disconnect Switch: Factory mount disconnect switch on equipment.

E. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Suitable for purpose specified and indicated.

2.5 LIFT FABRICATION

A. Lift constructed of welded steel components, with welds ground smooth and corners eased.

B. Isolate rotating and vibrating components with resilient mounts.

2.6 FACTORY FINISHING

A. Surface Prepping: Clean and degrease metal surface.

B. Primer: Sprayed and baked.

C. Finish: Two coats of enamel sprayed and baked; color as selected.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify liftway and machine space are ready for work of this Section.

C. Verify required openings are of correct size and within tolerances.

D. Verify electrical power is available and of correct characteristics.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with ASME A17.1.



B. Install system components in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and connect to building utilities and electrical service.

C. Accommodate equipment in space indicated.


A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements 01700 - Execution Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Perform tests required by ASME A17.2.3.

C. Schedule tests with two week notice.

D. Submit test and approval certificates issued by authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Welding: Inspect welds in accordance with AWS D1.1.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for starting and adjusting.

B. Adjust automatic floor leveling feature at each stop to stop platform within 1/4 inch of finished floor.

C. Adjust for smooth operation.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.

B. Remove protective coverings from finished surfaces. Clean surfaces and components ready for inspection.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for demonstration and training.

B. Demonstrate wheelchair lift operation and maintenance to Owner’s personnel.

3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished Work.

B. Do not allow wheelchair lift to be used for construction.

END OF SECTION


Plumbing Basic Requirements 22 00 00-1

SECTION 22 00 00

PLUMBING BASIC REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes basic plumbing requirements and reference to general requirements, products and specifications that are indicated on the Drawings.

B. Related Documents: Comply with all provisions and conditions of the Contract for this Construction, and the Contract Documents including Project Manual, Technical Specifications and Drawings with Specification Notations.

1.2 PRODUCTS







G. Warranties: 1. Reference Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements and specific warranty

requirements indicated on the Drawings work plumbing work. 2. Where warranty scope and durations may different between these documents,

provide warranties that conform to the more stringent version in favor of the Owner.

1.3 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES



Plumbing Basic Requirements 22 00 00-2

B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of one of the manufacturer’s named, a product meeting the specifications or a product equivalent to the named product.


D. Comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures.

E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on Shop Drawing or Product Data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to Contract Documents.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 REQUIREMENTS

A. As indicated on the Plumbing Drawings, which include Specifications for this Work.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 REQUIREMENTS

A. As indicated on the Plumbing Drawings, which include Specifications for this Work.

END OF SECTION


HVAC Basic Requirements 23 00 00-1

SECTION 23 00 00

HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR-CONDITIONING BASIC REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes basic HVAC requirements and reference to general requirements, products and specifications that are indicated on the Drawings.

B. Related Documents: Comply with all provisions and conditions of the Contract for this Construction, and the Contract Documents including Project Manual, Technical Specifications and Drawings with Specification Notations.

1.2 PRODUCTS







G. Warranties: 1. Reference Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements and specific warranty

requirements indicated on the Drawings work plumbing work. 2. Where warranty scope and durations may different between these documents,

provide warranties that conform to the more stringent version in favor of the Owner.




HVAC Basic Requirements 23 00 00-2





PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 REQUIREMENTS

A. As indicated on the Mechanical Drawings, which include Specifications for this Work.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 REQUIREMENTS

A. As indicated on the Mechanical Drawings, which include Specifications for this Work.

END OF SECTION


Electrical Basic Requirements 26 00 00-1

SECTION 26 00 00

ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes basic electrical requirements and reference to general requirements, products and specifications that are indicated on the Electrical Drawings.

B. Related Documents: Comply with all provisions and conditions of the Contract for this Construction, and the Contract Documents including Project Manual, Technical Specifications and Drawings with SPECIFICATION Notations.

C. Allowance and Unit Pricing Requirements.

1.2 ALLOWANCES & UNIT PRICES

A. Reference Section 01 20 00 - Price and Payment Procedures and Notations on the Drawings.

B. Provide an Allowance, as part of the Contract Sum, on the Bid Form for removal and replacement of non-code compliant, existing “Romex” circuits.

C. Provide a Unit Price for actual variations in the stipulated quantity per Linear Foot of such circuits on the Bid For.

1.3 PRODUCTS






F. Warranties: 1. Reference Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements and specific warranty

requirements indicated on the Drawings work plumbing work.



2. Where warranty scope and durations may different between these documents, provide warranties that conform to the more stringent version in favor of the Owner.







PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 REQUIREMENTS

A. As indicated on the Electrical Drawings, which include Specifications for this Work.

2.2 EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS

A. Wiring Terminations: Furnish terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Include lugs for terminal box.

B. Cord and Plug: Furnish minimum 6 foot cord and plug including grounding connector for connection to electric wiring system. Cord of longer length is specified in individual specification sections.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.



B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.

C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

D. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways and cables penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping.

B. Concrete Slabs and Masonry Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls where possible.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

E. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

F. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint,

G. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with appropriately rated and approved firestop materials in compliance with approved "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

3.3 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

A. As indicated on the Electrical Drawings, which include Specifications for this Work.

END OF SECTION

Project Manual Cover908 north thompson street richmond, virginia 23230 804-353-2635 12 April 2016...

Documents

Transcript of Project Manual Cover908 north thompson street richmond, virginia 23230 804-353-2635 12 April 2016...